System Documentation

Electronics
BlueVision_Basic | New Generation
Series 2000 / 4000
FPP / ADEC
Application: Marine
Functional description
Operating Instructions
Workshop Manual

E532396/05E
© 2016 Copyright MTU Friedrichshafen GmbH
This publication is protected by copyright and may not be used in any way, whether in whole or in part, without the prior writ-
ten consent of MTU Friedrichshafen GmbH. This particularly applies to its reproduction, distribution, editing, translation, micro-
filming and storage or processing in electronic systems including databases and online services.
All information in this publication was the latest information available at the time of going to print. MTU Friedrichshafen GmbH
reserves the right to change, delete or supplement the information provided as and when required.
 Table of Contents
1 Safety 2.4.2 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Technical data 70
2.4.3 Control panel PAN 9 – Technical data 71
1.1 Important provisions for all products 6 2.4.4 Display Basic DIS – Technical data 72
1.2 Personnel and organizational requirements 7 2.4.5 Display MFD – Technical data 73
1.3 Safety regulations for initial start-up and 2.4.6 ECU 7 – Technical data 75
operation 8 2.4.7 EIM 2 – Technical data 77
1.4 Safety regulations for maintenance and 2.4.8 PPC – Technical data 78
2.4.9 ROS 13–05 – Technical data 79
repair work 10
2.4.10 ROS 13–06 – Technical data 80
1.5 Fire prevention and environmental
2.4.11 ROS 15 – Technical data 81
protection, fluids and lubricants, indirect 2.4.12 ROS 16 – Technical data 82
materials 14 2.4.13 ROS 17 – Technical data 83
1.6 Standards for safety notices in the text 16 2.4.14 RIM 2 – Technical data 84
2.4.15 ROS 8 – Technical data 85
2 Functional Description 2.4.16 Emergency Panel – Technical data 86

2.1 Product Summary 17

2.1.1 System – Overview 17 3 Operating Instructions
2.1.2 Subsystems – Purpose 21
2.1.3 Numbering convention for multiple-engine 3.1 Indicators and Controls on the Control
plants 22 Stand 87
3.1.1 Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 87
2.2 Subsystems on the Control Stand 24 3.1.1.1 MCS-6 – Indicators and controls 87
2.2.1 Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 24 3.1.1.2 Control panel Start/Stop PAN – Indicators
2.2.1.1 MCS-6 – Overview 24 and controls 90
2.2.1.2 MCS-6 – Purpose of the units 28 3.1.1.3 Display Basic DIS – Display and controls 93
2.2.1.3 MCS-6 – Main control stand and slave 3.1.1.4 Display Basic DIS – Overview of the screen
control stands 33 pages 95
2.2.2 Remote Control System RCS-6 35 3.1.1.5 Engine speed instrument – Display overview 109
2.2.2.1 RCS-6 – Overview 35 3.1.1.6 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 113
2.2.2.2 RCS-6 – Purpose of the units 41 3.1.1.6.1 Display MFD – Display and controls 113
2.2.2.3 Emergency Panel – Purpose and use of the 3.1.1.6.2 Display MFD ‒ Overview of screen pages 115
device 45 3.1.2 Remote Control System RCS-6 121
2.2.2.4 RCS-HSG (portable control unit system) – 3.1.2.1 Command unit ROS 15 for one shaft 121
Purpose and function of the devices 47 3.1.2.2 Command unit ROS 13 for two shafts 123
2.2.2.5 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Dead man's 3.1.2.3 Command unit ROS 17 for two shafts 125
device 50 3.1.2.4 Command unit ROS 16 for three shafts 127
2.2.2.6 RCS-6 – Main control stand and slave control 3.1.2.5 Command unit ROS 13 for four shafts 131
stands 51 3.1.2.6 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 133
3.1.2.6.1 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Controls and
2.3 Subsystems in the Engine Room 57
indicators 133
2.3.1 Central Processing Unit of the Subsystems 57
3.1.2.6.2 Emergency Panel – Indicators and controls 136
2.3.1.1 Signal paths on Local Operating Panel LOP 57
2.3.1.2 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Purpose 60 3.2 Operation at the Control Stand 139
2.3.1.3 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 62 3.2.1 Switching the Overall System On and Off 139
2.3.1.3.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Purpose 62
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

3.2.1.1 Switching on the overall system, without

2.3.2 Engine Control System ECS-6 64 key switch 139
2.3.2.1 ECS -6 – Overview 64 3.2.1.2 Switching on the overall system, with key
2.3.2.2 ECS-6 – Purpose of the units 65 switch (optional) 140
2.3.2.3 ECS -6 – Interaction of devices and signal 3.2.1.3 Switching off the overall system, without
paths 67 key switch 141
2.3.3 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 68 3.2.1.4 Switching off the overall system, with key
2.3.3.1 Priming Pump Controller PPC – Purpose 68 switch (optional) 142
3.2.2 Operation at the Start/Stop PAN 143
2.4 Technical Data 69
3.2.2.1 Engine startup 143
2.4.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Technical data 69

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Table of Contents | 3

 3.2.2.2 Activating override function 144 3.3.2.2 Display on LOP 14 – Screen pages,
3.2.2.3 Override function – Deactivation 145 navigation and function keys 195
3.2.2.4 Engine – Shutdown 146 3.3.2.3 Priming Pump Controller PPC – Controls and
3.2.2.5 Engine – Emergency shutdown 147 indicators 214
3.2.3 Operating with command units (all variants) 148
3.2.3.1 Assuming initial command 148
3.4 Operation in the Engine Room 215
3.4.1 Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 215
3.2.3.2 Command transfer 149
3.4.1.1 Engine – Switching ready for operation 215
3.2.3.3 Maneuvering 150
3.4.1.2 Engine – Start-up 216
3.2.3.4 Crash Stop maneuver 151
3.4.1.3 Engine start-up (with optional PPC) 217
3.2.3.5 RCS propulsion modes 152
3.4.1.4 Engine shutdown 218
3.2.3.6 RCS modes – Additional functions (AUX) 153
3.4.1.5 Engine start – Interlock 219
3.2.3.7 Cruising mode (CRS) 154
3.4.1.6 Engine – Emergency shutdown 220
3.2.3.8 Smart Cruise mode (SCRS) 156
3.4.2 Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14
3.2.3.9 Trolling mode (TRL) 160
(optional) 221
3.2.3.10 Synchronization mode (SCL and SMART
3.4.2.1 Engine – Switching ready for operation 221
SYNC) 162
3.4.2.2 Local mode – Activation 222
3.2.3.11 SCL synchronization (Single Control Lever)
3.4.2.3 Local mode – Engine start-up 223
mode – Activation 163
3.4.2.4 Local mode – Engine start-up (with optional
3.2.3.12 SCL synchronization mode (Single Control
PPC) 224
Lever mode) – Deactivation 164
3.4.2.5 Local control mode – Gearbox engagement/
3.2.3.13 Synchronization mode (SMART SYNC) –
disengagement 226
Activation 165
3.4.2.6 Local control mode – Changing engine speed 228
3.2.3.14 Synchronization mode (SMART SYNC) –
3.4.2.7 Engine – Shutdown 229
Deactivation 166
3.4.2.8 Local mode – Deactivation 230
3.2.3.15 Warm-up mode – Engine speed adjustment
3.4.2.9 Engine start – interlock (manual start
without engagement 167
interlock) 231
3.2.3.16 Docking mode 168
3.4.2.10 Engine – Emergency shutdown 232
3.2.3.17 Smart Speed Adjust (SSA) 169
3.2.3.18 High Idle 170 3.5 Troubleshooting 233
3.2.4 Operation with the Portable Control Unit 3.5.1 System faults 233
(Option) 171 3.5.2 Troubleshooting 235
3.2.4.1 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Putting into 3.5.3 Troubleshooting – Control panel PAN 9 239
operation 171 3.5.4 Fault indication on the service display of Local
3.2.4.2 Assuming initial command on the portable Operating Panel LOP 240
control unit 173 3.5.5 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 242
3.2.4.3 Command transfer using portable control 3.5.5.1 Single-point alarm acknowledgment on
unit ROS 8 174 display MFD 242
3.2.4.4 Operation 175 3.5.5.2 Troubleshooting portable control unit ROS 8 243
3.2.4.5 Adjusting engine speed from the portable 3.5.5.3 Emergency Panel – Troubleshooting 246
control unit without engagement 176
3.2.4.6 Trolling mode – Selection 177
3.2.4.7 Trolling mode – Deselection 178 4 Workshop Manual
3.2.4.8 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Putting out of
operation 179 4.1 Operating Tests 247
3.2.5 Operation with the Emergency Panel 180 4.1.1 Overspeed test 247
3.2.5.1 Switching on Emergency Panel 180 4.1.2 Emergency stop test 248
3.2.5.2 Emergency Panel – Clutch engagement 181 4.1.3 Engine – Cranking 249
4.1.4 Lamp test 250
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

3.2.5.3 Change of direction with Emergency Panel 183

3.2.5.4 Engine speed change with Emergency Panel 185 4.1.5 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 251
3.2.5.5 Emergency Panel – Switching off 186 4.1.5.1 Test overspeed 251
3.2.5.6 Local Operating Panel LOP – Local mode 187 4.1.5.2 Emergency stop test 252
4.1.5.3 Engine – Turning 253
3.3 Indicators and Controls in the Engine Room 188
3.3.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Controls and 4.2 Checks and Settings 254
displays 188 4.2.1 Engine wiring – Check 254
3.3.2 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 192 4.2.2 Checking LOP control panel settings 255
3.3.2.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Controls 4.2.3 LOP display DIS – Setting 257
and displays 192 4.2.4 Control panel PAN 9 settings – Check 258

4 | Table of Contents | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.5 Control panel PAN 9 – Setting 259 4.3.20.3 SD card on MFD display – Replacement 331
4.2.6 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Configuration 4.3.20.4 Replacing battery on LOP 14 control panel 332
check 261 4.3.20.5 SD card on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 –
4.2.7 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Setting Replacement 335
configuration 263 4.3.20.6 Fuse on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 –
4.2.8 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Jumper Replacement 338
configuration check 268 4.3.20.7 Cable entry plate on Local Operating Panel
4.2.9 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 271 LOP 14 – Replacement 341
4.2.9.1 MFD display settings – Check 271 4.3.20.8 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 front panel
4.2.9.2 MFD display – Setting 272 LOS 4 – Replacement 343
4.2.9.3 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 configuration 4.3.20.9 Battery in LOS 4 front panel of LOP 14 –
– Check 275 Replacement 345
4.2.9.4 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 configuration 4.3.20.10 MEM in front panel of LOS 4 of LOP 14 –
– Setting 277 Installation 347
4.2.9.5 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 jumper 4.3.20.11 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 housing frame
configuration – Check 282 – Replacement 348
4.2.9.6 Oil priming pump control unit PPC – Check 4.3.20.12 Systembus Processing Unit SPU on Local
function 285 Operating Panel LOP 14 – Replacement 350
4.2.9.7 Assuming command at portable control unit 4.3.20.13 Configuration of CAN nodes
ROS 8 – Check 286 BlueVision_Basic | NewGeneration 352
4.2.9.8 Palm Beach command unit ROS 17 – 4.3.20.14 Replacing LOP 14 control panel 353
Settings 287 4.3.20.15 PPC Priming Pump Controller –
4.2.9.9 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Checking Replacement 357
speed control and clutch setting 289 4.3.20.16 Priming Pump Controller PPC – Repair 358
4.3.20.17 Emergency Panel – Replacement 360
4.3 Repair Work 290
4.3.1 ROS command unit – Replacement 290 4.4 Supplementary Technical Information 361
4.3.2 Analog display instrument – Replacement 291 4.4.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Design 361
4.3.3 Display Basic DIS – Replacement 292 4.4.2 Local Operating Panel LOP web function 368
4.3.4 SD card on display Basic DIS – Replacement 293 4.4.3 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 369
4.3.5 Control panel locking device – Replacement 294 4.4.3.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Design 369
4.3.6 Control panel cover cap – Replacement 296 4.4.3.2 Priming pump control unit PPC design 375
4.3.7 Control panel front panel – Replacement 297
4.3.8 Labeling kit for control panel – Replacement 299
4.3.9 Pushbutton for control panel – Replacement 301 5 Preparation for Putting into Operation after
4.3.10 Control panel PAN 9 – Replacement 303 Extended Out-of-Service Periods
4.3.11 Battery on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 –
Replacement 304 5.1 Putting into operation after extended out-of-
4.3.12 SD card on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – service periods 376
Replacement 307 5.2 Engine start at MCS after extended out-of-
4.3.13 One-time fuse on Local Operating Panel LOP service periods 377
13 – Replacement 310 5.3 Engine start at Local Operating Panel LOP
4.3.14 Cable entry plate on Local Operating Panel 13 after extended out-of-service periods 379
LOP 13 – Replacement 313 5.4 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 381
4.3.15 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 housing frame – 5.4.1 Engine start at Local Operating Panel LOP 14
Replacement 315 after extended out-of-service periods 381
4.3.16 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 front panel LOS
3 – Replacement 317
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

4.3.17 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 control panel 6 Appendix A

LOP-PAN – Replacement 319
4.3.18 Systembus Processing Unit SPU on Local 6.1 Conversion tables 383
Operating Panel LOP 13 – Replacement 321 6.2 List of abbreviations 388
4.3.19 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Replacement 324 6.3 MTU Contact/Service Partners 391
4.3.20 Indicators and Controls (Optional) 328
4.3.20.1 MFD display – Replacement 328 7 Appendix B
4.3.20.2 Replacing battery on MFD display 330
7.1 Index 392

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Table of Contents | 5

 1 Safety
1.1 Important provisions for all products
General information
This product may pose a risk of injury or damage in the following cases:
• Incorrect use
• Operation, maintenance and repair by unqualified personnel
• Changes or modifications which are neither made nor authorized by the manufacturer
• Noncompliance with the safety instructions and warning notices

Nameplates
The product is identified by nameplate, model designation or serial number and must match with the infor-
mation on the title page of this manual.
Nameplates, model designation or serial number can be found on the product.
All EU-certified engines delivered by MTU come with a second nameplate. When operating the machine in the
EU: The second nameplate must be affixed in a prominent position as described in the accompanying specifi-
cations.

Emission regulations and emission labels

Responsibility for compliance with emission regulations
Modification or removal of any mechanical/electronic components or the installation of additional compo-
nents including the execution of calibration processes that might affect the emission characteristics of the
product are prohibited by emission regulations. Emission control units/systems may only be maintained, ex-
changed or repaired if the components used for this purpose are approved by the manufacturer.
Noncompliance with these regulations will invalidate the design type approval issued by the emissions regu-
lation authorities. The manufacturer does not accept any liability for violations of the emission regulations.
The maintenance schedules of the manufacturer must be observed over the entire life cycle of the product.

Replacing components with emission labels

On all MTU engines fitted with emission labels, these labels must remain on the engine throughout its opera-
tional life.
Exception: Engines used exclusively in land-based, military applications other than by US government agen-
cies.
Please note the following when replacing components with emission labels:
• The relevant emission labels must be affixed to the spare part.
• Emission labels shall not be transferred from the replaced part to the spare part.
• The emission labels must be removed from the replaced part and destroyed.
TIM-ID: 0000040530 - 009

6 | Safety | E532396/05E 2016-11

 1.2 Personnel and organizational requirements
Organizational measures of the user/manufacturer
This manual must be issued to all personnel involved in operation, maintenance, repair, assembly, installa-
tion, or transportation.
Keep this manual handy in the vicinity of the product such that it is accessible to operating, maintenance,
repair, assembly, installation, and transport personnel at all times.
Personnel must receive instruction on product handling and repair based on this manual. In particular, per-
sonnel must have read and understood the safety requirements and warnings before starting work.
This is important in the case of personnel who only occasionally perform work on or around the product.
These personnel must be instructed repeatedly.

Personnel requirements
All work on the product must be carried out by trained, instructed and qualified personnel only:
• Training at the Training Center of the manufacturer
• Qualified personnel from the areas mechanical engineering, plant construction, and electrical engineering
The operator must define the responsibilities of the personnel involved in operation, maintenance, repair, as-
sembly, installation, and transport in writing.
Personnel shall not report for duty under the influence of alcohol, drugs or strong medication.

Clothing and personal protective equipment

Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment, e.g. safety shoes, ear protectors, protective gloves,
goggles, breathing mask. Follow the instructions concerning personal protective equipment in the descrip-
tions of the individual activities.
TIM-ID: 0000040531 - 010

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Safety | 7

 1.3 Safety regulations for initial start-up and operation
Safety regulations for initial start-up
Install the product correctly and carry out acceptance in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications
before putting the product into service. All necessary approvals must be granted by the relevant authorities
and all requirements for initial startup must be fulfilled.
Whenever the product is subsequently taken into operation ensure that:
• All personnel is clear of the danger zone surrounding moving parts of the machine.
Electrically-actuated linkages may be set in motion when the Engine Control Unit (governor) is switched
on.
• All maintenance and repair work has been completed.
• All loose parts have been removed from rotating machine components.
• All safety equipment is in place.
• No persons wearing pacemakers or any other technical body aids are present.
• The service room is adequately ventilated.
• In the first few hours of operation, the product emits gases as a result of smoldering e.g. lacquers or oil.
These gases may be hazardous to health. Always wear respiratory protection in the operating room during
this period.
• The exhaust system is leak-tight and that the gases are vented to atmosphere.
• The product must be free of any damage, this applies in particular to lines and cabling.
• Protect battery terminals, generator terminals or cables against accidental contact.
• Check that all connections have been correctly allocated e.g. +/- polarity, direction.
Immediately after putting the product into operation, make sure that all control and display instruments as
well as the signaling and alarm systems work properly.
Smoking is prohibited in the area of the product.

Safety regulations during operation

The operator must be familiar with the control and display elements.
The operator must be familiar with the consequences of any operations performed.
During operation, the display instruments and monitoring units must be permanently observed with regard to
present operating status, violation of limit values and warning or alarm messages.

Malfunctions and emergency stop

Practice emergency procedures, especially emergency stopping, at regular intervals.
The following steps must be taken if a malfunction of the system is recognized or reported by the system:
• inform supervisor(s) in charge,
• analyze the message,
• respond by taking any necessary emergency action, e.g. emergency stop.

Operation
Do not remain in the operating room when the product is running unless absolutely necessary. Keep your
TIM-ID: 0000040533 - 014

stay as short as possible.

Keep a safe distance away from the product if possible. Do not touch the product unless expressly instructed
to do so following a written procedure.
Do not inhale the exhaust gases of the product.
The following requirements must be fulfilled before the product is started:
• Wear ear protectors.
• Mop up any leaked or spilt fluids and lubricants immediately or soak up with a suitable binding agent.

8 | Safety | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Operation of electrical equipment
When electrical equipment is in operation, certain components of these appliances are electrically live.
Follow the applicable operating and safety instructions when operating the devices and heed warnings at all
times.
TIM-ID: 0000040533 - 014

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Safety | 9

 1.4 Safety regulations for maintenance and repair work
Safety regulations when preparing to perform maintenance and repair work
Have maintenance or repair work carried out by qualified and authorized personnel only.
Allow the product to cool down to less than 50 °C (risk of explosion for oil vapors, fluids and lubricants, risk
of burning).
Relieve pressure in fluid and lubricant systems and compressed-air lines which are to be opened. Use suita-
ble containers of adequate capacity to catch fluids and lubricants.
When changing the oil or working on the fuel system, ensure that the service room is adequately ventilated.
Never carry out maintenance and repair work with the product in operation, unless:
• It is expressly permitted to do so following a written procedure.
• The product is running in the low load range and only for as long as absolutely necessary.
Lock-out the product to preclude undesired starting, e.g.
• Start interlock
• Key switch
• With hydraulic starting system: shut off supply line.
Attach “Do not operate” sign in the operating area or to control equipment.
Disconnect the battery cables or actuate the battery isolating switch, if fitted. Lock circuit breakers.
Close the main valve on the compressed-air system and vent the compressed-air line when pneumatic start-
ers are fitted.
Disconnect the control equipment from the product.
Use the recommended special tools or suitable equivalents when instructed to do so.
Elastomer components (e.g. engine mounts, damping elements, couplings and V-belts) must not be painted.
Only install them after painting the engine or mask them prior to painting.
The following applies to starters with copper-beryllium alloy pinions:
• Wear a respirator mask (filter class P3). Do not blow out the interior of the flywheel housing or the starter
with compressed air. Clean the flywheel housing inside with a class H dust extraction device.
• Observe the safety data sheet.

Safety regulations when performing maintenance and repair work

Take special care when removing ventilation or plug screws from the product.
Release residual pressure before removing or replacing a component in the supply line. To depressurize pres-
surized lines, shut off the lines first, then release the residual pressure.
Use only proper and calibrated tools. Observe the specified tightening torques during assembly or disassem-
bly.
Carry out work only on assemblies or plants which are properly secured.
Use appropriate lifting equipment for all components. Use all specified attachment points and observe the
center of gravity.
TIM-ID: 0000040535 - 015

Never work on engines or components when they are held in place by lifting equipment.
Make sure components or assemblies are placed on stable surfaces. Adopt suitable measures to avoid that
components/tools fall down.
Never use the product as a climbing aid.
When working high on the equipment, always use suitable ladders and work platforms. Special instructions
for outdoor areas: There must be no risk of slipping e.g. due to icing.
Keep fuel injection lines and connections clean.

10 | Safety | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Carry out appropriate cleaning procedures to clean and inspect components requiring special cleanness
(e.g. components carrying oil, fuel, or air).
Always seal connections with caps or covers if a line is removed or opened.
Fit new seals when re-installing lines.
Never bend lines and avoid damaging lines, particularly the fuel lines.
Ensure that all retainers and dampers are installed correctly.
Ensure that O-rings are not installed in a slanted/twisted condition.
Ensure that all fuel injection and pressurized oil lines are installed with enough clearance to prevent contact
with other components. Do not place fuel or oil lines near hot components.
Do not touch elastomeric seals (e.g. Viton sealing rings) with your bare hands if they have a carbonized or
resinous appearance.
Note cooling time for components which are heated for installation or removal (risk of burning).
Pay particular attention to cleanliness at all times.
Remove any accumulation of condensate after assembling chilled components. Coat the components with a
suitable corrosion inhibitor as necessary.

Safety regulations after performing maintenance and repair work

Before barring the engine, make sure that nobody is standing in the danger zone of the product.
Check that all access ports/apertures which have been opened to facilitate working are closed again.
Check that all safety equipment has been installed and that all tools and loose parts have been removed
(especially the barring tool).
Ensure that no unattached parts have been left in/on the product (e.g. including rags and cable straps).
Ensure that the grounding system is properly connected.

Welding work
Welding operations on the product or mounted units are not permitted. Cover the product when welding in
its vicinity.
Before starting welding work:
• Switch off the power supply master switch.
• Disconnect the battery cables or actuate the battery isolating switch.
• Separate the electrical ground of electronic equipment from the ground of the unit.
No other maintenance or repair work must be carried out in the vicinity of the product while welding is in
progress. There is a risk of explosion or fire due to oil vapors or highly flammable fluids and lubricants.
Do not use product as ground terminal.
Never position the welding power supply cable adjacent to, or crossing wiring harnesses of the product. The
welding current can induce interfering voltages in the wiring harnesses which may damage the electrical sys-
tem.
TIM-ID: 0000040535 - 015

Remove components (e.g. exhaust pipe) from the product before performing necessary welding work.

Hydraulic installation and removal

Check the function and safe operating condition of tools and fixtures to be used. Use only the specified devi-
ces for hydraulic removal/installation procedures.
Observe the max. permissible push-on pressure specified for the equipment.
Do not attempt to bend or apply force to lines which are under pressure.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Safety | 11

 Before starting work, pay attention to the following:
• Vent the installation/removal device, the pumps and the pipework at the relevant designated points.
• For hydraulic installation, screw on the tool with the piston retracted.
• For hydraulic removal, screw on the tool with the piston extended.
For a hydraulic installation/removal device with central expansion pressure supply, screw spindle into shaft
end until correct sealing is established.
During hydraulic installation and removal, ensure that nobody is standing in the immediate vicinity of the
component to be installed/removed.

Working with batteries

Observe the safety instructions of the manufacturer when working on batteries.
Gases released from the battery are explosive. Avoid sparks and naked flames.
Do not allow battery acids to come into contact with skin or clothing.
Wear protective clothing, goggles and protective gloves.
Do not place objects on the battery.
Before connecting the cable to the battery, check the battery polarity. The battery may explode and spray
acid if the battery terminals are connected incorrectly.

Working on electrical and electronic assemblies

Always obtain the permission of the person in charge before commencing maintenance and repair work or
switching off any part of the electronic system required to do so.
De-energize the appropriate areas prior to working on assemblies.
ESD: Work on electrostatically endangered components which could be damaged by electrostatic discharge
(ESD) must always be carried out with appropriate equipment. Appropriate equipment is e.g. electrically con-
ductive work surfaces or antistatic wristbands.
Do not damage wiring during removal work. When reconnecting, ensure that cabling cannot be damaged dur-
ing operation by:
• Contact with sharp edges
• Chafing on components
• Contact with hot surfaces.
Do not secure cables on lines carrying fluids.
Do not use cable ties to secure lines.
Always use connector pliers to tighten union nuts on connectors.
Subject the device as well as the product to functional testing on completion of all repair work. The emergen-
cy stop function must be tested in particular.
Store spare parts properly prior to replacement, i.e. protect them against moisture in particular. Package
faulty electronic components or assemblies properly before dispatching for repair:
• Moisture-proof
• Shock-proof
TIM-ID: 0000040535 - 015

• Wrapped in antistatic foil (as necessary)

Working with laser equipment

Work with laser devices shall be carried out by trained and qualified personnel only. Follow the safety in-
structions in the manufacturer's user manual when working with laser equipment.
Wear special laser safety glasses when working with laser equipment (danger of concentrated radiation).
Laser equipment must be fitted with the protective devices necessary for safe operation according to type
and application.

12 | Safety | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Measuring component dimensions
Workpieces, components and measuring equipment lie in the specified tolerance range at a reference tem-
perature of 20 °C.
TIM-ID: 0000040535 - 015

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Safety | 13

 1.5 Fire prevention and environmental protection, fluids and
lubricants, indirect materials
Fire prevention
Flames, naked light and smoking are prohibited.
Ensure the area is well ventilated when working with combustible indirect materials (e.g. cleaning agents).
The resultant steam/air mixture must be sufficiently diluted to prevent a potentially explosive atmosphere.
Rectify any fuel or oil leaks immediately. Oil or fuel on hot components can cause fires so keep the product
clean at all times. Do not leave rags saturated with fluids and lubricants on the product. Do not store com-
bustible materials near the product.
Clean welding points with a non-flammable fluid before welding. Do not carry out welding work on pipes and
components carrying oil or fuel.
When starting the engine with an external power source, connect the ground lead last and remove it first. To
avoid sparks in the vicinity of the battery, connect the ground lead from the external power source to the
ground lead of the engine or to the ground terminal of the starter.
Ensure that suitable extinguishing agents (fire extinguisher) are always available and that staff are familiar
with their correct handling.

Noise
Wear ear protectors in work areas with a sound pressure level in excess of 85 dB (A).
Noise can lead to an increased risk of accident if acoustic signals, warning shouts or noises indicating dan-
ger are drowned.

Environmental protection and disposal

Dispose of used fluids, lubricants and components in accordance with local regulations.
Within the EU, batteries can be returned free of charge to the manufacturer where they will be properly recy-
cled.

Indirect materials, fluids and lubricants

Indirect materials, fluids and lubricants may be hazardous or contain toxic substances. Observe the informa-
tion provided in the safety data sheet for the product when using indirect materials and other chemical sub-
stances. The safety data sheet may be obtained from the relevant manufacturer or from MTU.

Used oil
Used oil contains harmful combustion residue.
Wear protective gloves!
Wash relevant areas after contact with used oil.
TIM-ID: 0000040536 - 012

Lead
• Adopt suitable measures to avoid the formation of lead dust.
• Switch on extraction system.
• Avoid direct contact with lead or pastes containing lead.
• Do not inhale lead vapors.
• Wash affected areas after contact with lead or substances containing lead.

14 | Safety | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Compressed air
• Unauthorized use of compressed air, e.g. forcing flammable liquids (hazard class AI, AII and B) out of con-
tainers, risks causing an explosion.
• Wear goggles when blowing off components or blowing away chips.
• Blowing compressed air into thin-walled containers (e.g. containers made of sheet metal, plastic or glass)
for drying purposes or to check for leaks risks bursting them.
• Pay special attention to the pressure level in the compressed air network or pressure vessel.
• Assemblies or products which are to be connected must be designed to withstand this pressure. Install
pressure-reducing or safety valves set to the admissible pressure if this is not the case.
• Hose couplings and connections must be securely attached.
• Provide the snout of the air nozzle with a protective disk (e.g. rubber disk).
• Relieve residual pressure before removing compressed-air equipment from the supply line. To depressu-
rize compressed-air lines, shut off the lines first, then release the residual pressure.
• Perform leak testing in accordance with instructions.

Paints and lacquers

• Observe the relevant safety data sheet for all materials.
• When carrying out painting work outside the spray stands provided with fume extraction systems, ensure
that the area is well ventilated. Make sure that neighboring work areas are not impaired.
• Avoid open flames in the vicinity.
• No smoking.
• Observe fire prevention regulations.
• Always wear a mask providing protection against paint and solvent vapors.

Liquid nitrogen
• Observe the relevant safety data sheet for all materials.
• Work with liquid nitrogen may be carried out only by qualified personnel.
• Store liquid nitrogen only in small quantities and always in regulation containers without fixed covers.
• Avoid body contact (eyes, hands).
• Wear protective clothing, protective gloves, closed shoes and protective goggles / safety mask.
• Make sure that the working area is well ventilated.
• Avoid all knocks and jars to the containers, fixtures or workpieces.

Acids/alkaline solutions/urea (AdBlue®, DEF)

• Observe the relevant safety data sheet for all materials.
• When working with acids and alkaline solutions, wear protective goggles or face mask, gloves and protec-
tive clothing.
• Do not inhale vapors.
• If urea solution is swallowed, rinse out mouth and drink plenty of water.
• Remove any wet clothing immediately.
• Wash affected body areas with plenty of water after skin contact.
• Rinse eyes immediately with eyedrops or clean tap water after eye contact. Seek medical attention as
soon as possible.
TIM-ID: 0000040536 - 012

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Safety | 15

 1.6 Standards for safety notices in the text
DANGER
In the event of immediate danger.
Consequences: Death, serious or permanent injury!
• Remedial action.

WARNING
In the event of a situation involving potential danger.
Consequences: Death, serious or permanent injury!
• Remedial action.

CAUTION
In the event of a situation involving potential danger.
Consequences: Minor or moderate injuries!
• Remedial action.

NOTICE
In the event of a situation involving potentially adverse effects on the product.
Consequences: Material damage!
• Remedial action.
• Additional product information.

Warning notices
1. This manual with all safety instructions and safety notices must be issued to all personnel involved in opera-
tion, maintenance, repair, assembly, installation, or transportation.
2. The higher level warning notice is used if several hazards apply at the same time. Warnings related to person-
al injury shall be considered to include a warning of potential damage.

TIM-ID: 0000040578 - 005

16 | Safety | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2 Functional Description
2.1 Product Summary
2.1.1 System – Overview
Overview and subsystems
The BlueVision_Basic | New Generation system is used to operate, control and monitor a marine propulsion
plant with up to six control stands. It can be used for fixed-pitch propeller systems with between one and
four engines and is available in a range of different versions.
The BlueVision_Basic | New Generation system comprises three subsystems the interaction of which is rep-
resented schematically in the figure.

Versions
Local Operating Panel LOP 13 serves as the central processing unit for all subsystems. Local Operating Panel
LOP 14 is also available as an optional.
The Basic DIS is used on the control stands; for the main control stand and slave control stands 1 to 5 (op-
tional). An MFD display may also be used as an optional; for the main control stand and slave control stands
1 to 3 (optional).

Example 1: One display Basic DIS for each power train

TIM-ID: 0000038451 - 004

A Control stand 1 MCS-6 components 3 ECS-6 components

B Engine room 2 RCS-6 components 4 CAN bus

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Functional Description | 17

 Central processing unit for all subsystems (Local Operating Panel LOP 13; LOP 14
optional)
• Acquisition and display of process values
• Data output at display units and indicators
• Process control and process monitoring
• Communication interface between MCS and RCS
• Communication interface between ECS and MCS, and between ECS and RCS
• Alarm management and acknowledgment

Engine Control System ECS-6

• Sensors and actuators on and around the engine
• Devices for direct control of the engine
• Same set of hardware for each power train
• All devices on engine
• No access for operator in normal operation

Monitoring and Control System MCS-6

• Remote monitoring of the propulsion plant
• Various controls and indicators on each control stand
• Same set of hardware for each power train
• One display for each power train on every control stand; for the main control stand and slave control
stands 1 to 5 (optional)

Remote Control System RCS-6

• Remote control of engine speed and gearbox state
• Command unit with propulsion control levers for operation
• One command unit for two power trains on each control stand

TIM-ID: 0000038451 - 004

18 | Product Summary | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Example 2: One MFD display for each power train (optional)

A Control stand 1 MCS-6 components 3 ECS-6 components

B Engine room 2 RCS-6 components 4 CAN bus

Central processing unit for all subsystems (Local Operating Panel LOP 13; LOP 14
optional)
• Acquisition and display of process values
• Data output at display units and indicators
• Process control and process monitoring
• Communication interface between MCS and RCS
• Communication interface between ECS and MCS, and between ECS and RCS
• Alarm management and acknowledgment

Engine Control System ECS-6

• Sensors and actuators on and around the engine
• Devices for direct control of the engine
• Same set of hardware for each power train
• All devices on engine
• No access for operator in normal operation
TIM-ID: 0000038451 - 004

Monitoring and Control System MCS-6

• Remote monitoring of the propulsion plant
• Various controls and indicators on each control stand
• Same set of hardware for each power train
• One display for each power train on every control stand; for the main control stand and slave control
stands 1 to 3 (optional)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Product Summary | 19

 Remote Control System RCS-6
• Remote control of engine speed and gearbox state
• Command unit with propulsion control levers for operation
• One command unit for two power trains on each control stand

Features
Structure and function
• Electronic engine governing and monitoring for optimized consumption and performance
• Consideration of individual engine characteristics
• Digital data transmission
• Compact, highly-integrated devices
• Symmetrical port/starboard arrangement
• Graphical representation on color display
• Plain text fault messages on multilingual display

Safety
• Integral alarm system
• Integral self-test features
• Additional parallel connection of safety-relevant signals

Operation
• Straightforward operation
• User interface for local control at Local Operating Panel
• Master shaft features (Single Control Lever mode)

Installation
• Straightforward installation and start-up
• Standardized electrical interfaces

TIM-ID: 0000038451 - 004

20 | Product Summary | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.1.2 Subsystems – Purpose
Subsystem composition
The subsystems comprise the displays, indicators and controls and the associated equipment in Local Oper-
ating Panel LOP.

Central processing unit of the subsystems

The Local Operating Panel LOP 13 serves as the central processing unit for Monitoring and Control System
MCS-6 and Remote Control System RCS-6. The Local Operating Panel interfaces with Engine Control System
ECS-6 and serves as a control and display unit in the engine room.
The power train can also be controlled in Local mode using Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional).

Subsystem MCS-6
The displays/indicators of the Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 inform the operator about propulsion
plant operating and alarm states.
The propulsion plant can be controlled using the MCS-6 controls. The input signals are transmitted to Engine
Control System ECS-6 via Local Operating Panel LOP.

Subsystem RCS-6
The Remote Control System RCS-6 has the task of controlling the engine speed and gearbox state input sig-
nals.
The input signals from the control unit of the active control stand are transmitted to the Engine Control Sys-
tem ECS-6 via Local Operating Panel LOP.

Subsystem ECS-6
The Engine Control System ECS-6 is used to
• Engine management
• Monitoring power train operational data
Input values entered by the operator at the MCS-6 or RCS-6 are transmitted to the ECS-6 via Local Operating
Panel LOP, and converted into control signals for the engine and gearbox by ECS-6.
Measured sensor values acquired by the ECS-6 and alarm signals are transmitted via Local Operating Panel
LOP to the MCS-6 and/or RCS-6 where they are displayed.
TIM-ID: 0000038452 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Product Summary | 21

 2.1.3 Numbering convention for multiple-engine plants
Numbering convention for MTU electronic equipment
In propulsion plants with more than one power train, MTU electronic equipment such as devices, cables etc.
are identified with numbers to allocate them uniquely to the power trains. These numbers appear in the rele-
vant MTU documentation on the equipment. The numbers are assigned according to the following conven-
tion:

Twin-engine system
1 Starboard
2 Port

Three-engine system
1 Starboard
2 Port
3 Center

TIM-ID: 0000008112 - 004

22 | Product Summary | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Four-engine system
1 Starboard outer engine
2 Port outer engine
3 Starboard inner engine
4 Port inner engine
TIM-ID: 0000008112 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Product Summary | 23

 2.2 Subsystems on the Control Stand
2.2.1 Monitoring and Control System MCS-6

2.2.1.1 MCS-6 – Overview

Features
The Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 is configured to suit the requirements of the vessel. Within the
BlueVision_Basic | New Generation system it can be extended for plants with
• one to four engines,
• one to six control stands.
The MCS-6 is connected to the ECS-6 of the power train via Local Operating Panel LOP.

Example: twin-engine plant with six control stands and Basic DIS

No. Designation Explanation

A Engine room -
B Main control stand (→ Page 33)
TIM-ID: 0000038458 - 004

C Slave control stand 1 (Optional), (→ Page 33)

D Slave control stand 2 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
E Slave control stand 3 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
F Slave control stand 4 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
G Slave control stand 5 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
H Ethernet system bus -
I CAN bus CANopen/CAN J1939/MCS-5 protocol
K Hardware signals (hard wired) Emergency stop, key switch, network On

24 | Subsystems on the Control Stand | E532396/05E 2016-11

 No. Designation Explanation
1 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
2 Subsystem ECS-6 (port) Engine Control System (→ Page 64)
3 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
4 CAN bus (port) Between ECS-6 and LOP
5 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)
6 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and
5
7 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and 5
8 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and 6
9 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and
6
10 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and
6
11 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and 6
12 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and
5
13 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and 5
14 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
15 CAN bus (starboard) Between ECS-6 and LOP
16 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
17 Subsystem ECS-6 (starboard) Engine Control System (→ Page 64)
18 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
19 Gearbox (starboard) -
20 Engine (starboard) -
21 Gearbox (port) -
22 Engine (port) -

Table 1: Twin-engine plant with six control stands and Basic DIS
TIM-ID: 0000038458 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 25

 Example: twin-engine plant with six control stands and MFD display (optional)

No. Designation Explanation

A Engine room -
B Main control stand (→ Page 33)
C Slave control stand 1 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
D Slave control stand 2 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
E Slave control stand 3 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
F Slave control stand 4 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
G Slave control stand 5 (Optional), (→ Page 33)
H Ethernet system bus -
I CAN bus CANopen/CAN J1939/MCS-5 protocol
K Hardware signals (hard wired) Emergency stop, key switch, network On
1 CAN bus (port) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
2 Subsystem ECS-6 (port) Engine Control System (→ Page 64)
3 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
TIM-ID: 0000038458 - 004

4 CAN bus (port) Between ECS-6 and LOP

5 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)
6 CAN bus, J1939 / MCS-5 protocol (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and
5
7 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and 5
8 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and 6

26 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 No. Designation Explanation
9 CAN bus, J1939 / MCS-5 protocol (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and
6
10 CAN bus, J1939 / MCS-5 protocol (star- Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and
board) 6
11 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and 6
12 CAN bus, J1939 / MCS-5 protocol (star- Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and
board) 5
13 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and 5
14 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
15 CAN bus (starboard) Between ECS-6 and LOP
16 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
17 Subsystem ECS-6 (starboard) Engine Control System (→ Page 64)
18 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
19 Gearbox (starboard) -
20 Engine (starboard) -
21 Gearbox (port) -
22 Engine (port) -

Table 2: Twin-engine plant with six control stands and MFD display
TIM-ID: 0000038458 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 27

 2.2.1.2 MCS-6 – Purpose of the units
Indicators and controls
Key switch and alarm horn

1 Key switch 2 Alarm horn 3 Alarm horn

Key switch (1) (optional):
• Main key switch (Master-Key-Switch) for switching the entire system of the power train concerned on/off.
• RCS key switch serving as an immobilizer
Alarm horn (2) (optional) for control stands:
• Warnings when operating at limits
• Alarms in case of inadmissible operating states
• Signaling inadmissible operator inputs
Alarm horn (3) (optional) for control stands:
• Warnings when operating at limits
• Alarms in case of inadmissible operating states
TIM-ID: 0000038459 - 002

28 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Display instruments

Analog display instruments for

• Engine speed with display for additional indication of measured values and alarms
• Engine coolant temperature
• Gear oil temperature
• Engine lube oil pressure
• Gear control oil pressure
The display instrument pointers may indicate a fault:
• Pointer = 0 after switching on the operating voltage. No information or faults pending.
• Pointer –10° below 0 after switching on the operating voltage. No communication on the CAN bus. A fault
has occurred.
TIM-ID: 0000038459 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 29

 Basic DIS

Display to indicate:
• Engine and gearbox operating states
• Single-point alarms
• System information
• One display to monitor each power train
• Power train dimming
One display for each power train on every main control stand, optional for slave control stands.
Communication via J1939 CAN bus with Local Operating Panel LOP 13, optionally with Local Operating Panel
LOP 14, of the power train concerned.
TIM-ID: 0000038459 - 002

30 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Display MFD (option)

Display to indicate:
• Engine and gearbox operating states
• Single-point alarms
• System information
• One display to monitor each power train
• Help
Operation:
• Dimming of the instruments and devices
• Alarm acknowledgment
One display for each power train on every main control stand, optional for slave control stands.
Communication via CAN bus using the MCS-5 protocol with Local Operating Panel LOP 13, optionally with
Local Operating Panel LOP 14, of the power train concerned.
TIM-ID: 0000038459 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 31

 Control panel PAN 9

Control panel PAN 9 Start/Stop PAN version with the following features:
• Operation of the propulsion plant
– Engine start
– Engine stop
– Emergency engine stop
– Safety system override
• Locking device to prevent inadvertent activation of the emergency engine stop or safety system override
functions
• Displaying
– Start/Stop PAN operating states
– Propulsion plant operating states
– Summary alarms:
– For warnings when operating at limits
– In case of inadmissible operating states
– In case of system faults
• Horn off
One Start/Stop PAN for each power train on every control stand.
Communication via J1939 CAN bus with Local Operating Panel LOP 13, optionally with Local Operating Panel
TIM-ID: 0000038459 - 002

LOP 14, of the power train concerned.

32 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.2.1.3 MCS-6 – Main control stand and slave control stands
The controls, displays and indicators for the various control stands are located on the main control stand and
the slave control stands (optional).

Example: Version with Basic DIS

No. Designation Explanation

A Engine room -
B Main control stand -
C Slave control stand 1 (Optional)
1 Key switch On main control stand (optional) (→ Page 28)
2 Alarm horn (optional) Various designs for control stands (→ Page 28)
3 Control panel PAN 9 Start/Stop PAN (→ Page 28),
Operation of the propulsion plant, display of operat-
ing states, warnings and summary alarms
4 Basic DIS To indicate operating states, warnings, alarms and
system information
TIM-ID: 0000038480 - 004

5 Engine speed display instrument Analog (→ Page 28)

6 Engine operating data display instruments Analog (→ Page 28)
7 CAN bus, J1939 To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 33

 No. Designation Explanation
8 CAN bus, J1939 Between Local Operating Panel LOP and MCS-6
9 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
central processing unit in the engine room

Table 3: BlueVision Basic NG MCS-6 on control stand

TIM-ID: 0000038480 - 004

34 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.2.2 Remote Control System RCS-6

2.2.2.1 RCS-6 – Overview

Features
The Remote Control System RCS-6 is configured to suit the requirements of the vessel. Within the BlueVi-
sion_Basic | New Generation system it can be extended for plants with
• one to four engines,
• one to six control stands.
The RCS-6 is connected to the ECS-6 of the power train via Local Operating Panel LOP.
The following systems can be connected as an option:
• RCS-HSG extension system (portable control unit)
• Emergency Panel as control unit should the normal control system fail.

Example: Twin-engine plant with six stationary control stands

Item Description Explanation

A Engine room -
TIM-ID: 0000038453 - 005

B Main control stand (→ Page 51)

C Slave control stand 1 (Optional), (→ Page 51)
D Slave control stand 2 (Optional), (→ Page 51)
E Slave control stand 3 (Optional), (→ Page 51)
F Slave control stand 4 (Optional), (→ Page 51)
G Slave control stand 5 (Optional), (→ Page 51)
H Ethernet system bus -
I CAN bus CANopen/CAN J1939/MCS-5 protocol

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 35

 Item Description Explanation
K Hardware signals (hard wired) Emergency stop, key switch, network On
1 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
2 Subsystem ECS-6 (port) Engine control system (→ Page 64)
3 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
4 CAN bus (port) Between ECS-6 and LOP
5 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 Optional Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)
6 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and
5
7 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and 5
8 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and 6
9 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and
6
10 Command unit Type ROS 13
11 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and
6
12 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 2, 4 and 6
13 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and
5
14 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of control stands 1, 3 and 5
15 Command unit Type ROS 17
ROS 13 possible on all control stands as an alterna-
tive command unitROS 13 auf allen Fahrständen mö-
glich
16 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 Optional Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
17 CAN bus (starboard) Between ECS-6 and LOP
18 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
19 Subsystem ECS-6 (starboard) Engine control system (→ Page 64)
20 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
21 Gearbox (starboard) -
22 Engine (starboard) -
TIM-ID: 0000038453 - 005

23 Gearbox (port) -
24 Engine (port) -

Table 4: Twin-engine plant with six stationary control stands

36 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Example: Twin engine plant with two stationary control stands and Emergency
Panel

Item Description Explanation

A Engine room -
B Main control stand (→ Page 51)
C Slave control stand 1 (Optional), (→ Page 51)
D Ethernet system bus -
E CAN bus CANopen/CAN J1939/MCS-5 protocol
F Hardware signals (hard wired) Emergency stop, key switch, network On
1 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
2 Subsystem ECS-6 (port) Engine control system (→ Page 64)
3 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
4 CAN bus (port) Between ECS-6 and LOP
5 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
TIM-ID: 0000038453 - 005

(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)
6 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between LOP and Emergency Panel
7 Emergency Panel (port) Control unit (only used when the normal control sys-
tem has failed.)
8 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of the main control stand
9 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of the main control stand
10 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 37

 Item Description Explanation
11 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)
12 ROS 13 Command unit to control the outer power trains
13 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)
14 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)
15 Emergency Panel (starboard) Control unit (only used when the normal control sys-
tem has failed.)
16 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of the main control stand
17 Hard-wired signals(Hard wired) Between Emergency Panel and LOP
18 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of the main control stand
19 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
20 CAN bus (starboard) Between ECS-6 and LOP
21 Subsystem ECS-6 (starboard) Engine control system (→ Page 64)
22 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
23 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
24 Gearbox (starboard) -
25 Engine (starboard) -
26 Gearbox (port) -
27 Engine (port) -

Table 5: Twin engine plant with two stationary control stands and Emergency Panel

TIM-ID: 0000038453 - 005

38 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Example: Twin engine plant with two stationary control stands and portable
control unit ROS 8

Item Description Explanation

A Engine room -
B Main control stand (→ Page 51)
C Slave control stand 1 (Optional), (→ Page 51)
D Ethernet system bus -
E CAN bus CANopen/CAN J1939/MCS-5 protocol
F Hardware signals (hard wired) Emergency stop, key switch, network On
1 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
2 Subsystem ECS-6 (port) Engine control system (→ Page 64)
3 HW signals (Hard wired) (port) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
4 CAN bus (port) Between ECS-6 and LOP
5 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
TIM-ID: 0000038453 - 005

(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)
6 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of the main control stand
7 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of the main control stand
8 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and RCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)
9 CAN bus, J1939 (port) Between LOP and MCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)
10 ROS 13 Command unit to control the outer power trains

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 39

 Item Description Explanation
11 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)
12 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of slave control stand 1
(optional)
13 Connecting socket Mobile control stand, (optional), max. 4;
for portable control unit
14 ROS 8 Portable control unit (optional) (port/starboard)
15 RIM 2 Remote Interface Module for extension system RCS-
HSG, (optional);
operating voltage and signals
16 CAN bus, J1939 (starboard) Between LOP and MCS-6 of the main control stand
17 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between cable W215 from ROS command unit in last
control stand of RCS line 1 (control stand 1, 3 or 5)
and Remote Interface Module RIM 2
18 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and RCS-6 of the main control stand
19 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
20 CAN bus (starboard) Between ECS-6 and LOP
21 Subsystem ECS-6 (starboard) Engine control system (→ Page 64)
22 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
23 HW signals (Hard wired) (starboard) Between ECS-6 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-
ing harness)
24 Gearbox (starboard) -
25 Engine (starboard) -
26 Gearbox (port) -
27 Engine (port) -

Table 6: Twin engine plant with two stationary control stands and portable control unit ROS 8

TIM-ID: 0000038453 - 005

40 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.2.2.2 RCS-6 – Purpose of the units
Controls
Command unit
There are different types of command units depending on the number of propulsion trains. All types are
equipped with the following:
• Control pushbuttons to transfer command, for alarm acknowledgment, selection of Single Control Lever
mode and Trolling (optional)
• LEDs to display operation and fault states
• Engagement locks to set engagement/disengagement
• Integrated horn to signal operations and alarms

Command unit ROS 13

Central control unit of RCS-6 for twin-engine plants:

• One propulsion control lever for each propulsion train
• The gearbox setting and the engine speed can be set separately from each other for both propulsion
trains.
TIM-ID: 0000038454 - 005

ROS 13–05 and ROS 13–06 only differ in the length of the propulsion control levers.
Two ROS 13 command units are used on each control stand on four-engine plants.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 41

 Command unit ROS 15

Central control unit of RCS-6 for single-engine plants:

• The two propulsion control levers are connected mechanically.
• Gearbox position and engine speed can be set.
The following combination is possible on triple-engine plants (for each control stand):
• One ROS 13 command unit for the outer shafts
• One ROS 15 command unit for the middle shaft.

TIM-ID: 0000038454 - 005

42 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Command unit ROS 16

Central control unit of RCS-6 for triple-engine plants:

• The two center propulsion control levers are connected mechanically and control the center propulsion
train.
• The two outer propulsion control levers control the two wing propulsion trains.
• Gearbox state and engine speed can be set independently for each of the three power trains.
TIM-ID: 0000038454 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 43

 Command unit ROS 17

Central control unit of RCS-6 for twin-engine plants:

• One propulsion control lever for each propulsion train
• The gearbox setting and the engine speed can be set separately from each other for both propulsion
trains.
Propulsion control lever variants (optional):
• Propulsion control lever without control pushbutton for bow thruster
• Propulsion control lever with control pushbutton for bow thruster

TIM-ID: 0000038454 - 005

44 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.2.2.3 Emergency Panel – Purpose and use of the device

Use
The Emergency Panel is an extension of Remote Control System RCS-6:
• The Emergency Panel is only used in case of emergency should the normal control system fail.
• It facilitates control of the main engine and gear functions of the vessel (emergency mode).
• It functions independently of any specific shaft
The controller in the LOP is bypassed when the Emergency Panel is in use providing that Local mode is not
active at the LOP. All controller safeguards (engagement interlocks) which protect the propulsion plant are
thus disabled.
All controller monitoring features which ensure that limit values are respected, including alarm signaling, are
maintained as long as the MCS controller in the LOP remains intact.
This system extension is exclusively designed for MTU RCS and fixed pitch propeller applications.
Visual and audible alarm signaling via the MCS is only possible if the MCS controller in the LOP is still intact.

Control
Communication between the Emergency Panel and Local Operating Panel LOP is realized by HW signals on
TIM-ID: 0000068086 - 001

cable W201. The indicators on the Emergency Panel cannot be dimmed using the MCS-6 displays (hard-
wired).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 45

 Emergency Panel cable

X7 Plug connector at LOP X7.1 Ground connection at LOP

X1 Plug connector, Emergency X1.1 Ground connection at Emer-
Panel gency Panel
Cable W201 to connect the Emergency Panel to the LOP (connector X7).

TIM-ID: 0000068086 - 001

46 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.2.2.4 RCS-HSG (portable control unit system) – Purpose and function of the devices
Portable control unit ROS 8

Control unit of the RCS-HSG system

Mobile control stand as extension of the existing Remote Control System.
Features:
• Connecting cable to connecting socket, 10 m long
• Thumbwheels to control gearbox state and engine speed
• Control buttons for command transfer and Trolling mode activation (optional)
• LEDs to indicate operating and fault states
• Locks at the disengagement/engagement positions
• Integrated horn to signal operations and alarms
• Safety circuit (“deadman's control”) providing operational safety if the operator should loose the com-
manding portable control unit.
One portable control unit ROS 8 controls two power trains:
• Gearbox state and engine speed can be set for both power trains separately.
• Command can be assumed only for the two power trains together, the same applies to Trolling mode acti-
vation.
TIM-ID: 0000038455 - 002

• On propulsion plants with more than two power trains, the device controls the wing shafts.
The Yard can connect three additional devices, which are not controlled by the RCS, to the ROS 8 via floating
contacts:
• Windlass
• Bow thruster
• Stern thruster

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 47

 Connecting socket

To connect portable control unit ROS 8 in the desired location on board the vessel;
with protective cap

TIM-ID: 0000038455 - 002

48 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Remote Interface Module RIM 2

Interface of the extension system RCS-HSG to the higher-level Remote Control System RCS.
• Detection of commanding status of the portable control unitROS 8
• Processing of signals from the portable control unit ROS 8 and transmission to the central control unit of
the Remote Control System RCS
• Acquisition of feedback signals from the RCS and transmission to the portable control unit ROS 8
• Automatically correct bus termination when connecting/disconnecting the portable control unit ROS 8
to/from a connection point
One common RIM 2 for up to two power trains (at main control stand)
• Connection to up to four points of connection on board
• Up to 30 m cable length between RIM 2 and connection point
Communication with the Remote Control System RCS via CAN bus (coordination field bus)
LED indication for servicing and initial start-up
TIM-ID: 0000038455 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 49

 2.2.2.5 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Dead man's device

The hand strap of the portable control unit ROS 8 serves as a so-called dead man's device. This is a safety
circuit providing the following functions:
• The ROS 8 can only assume command or stay in command if the nipple (2) of the hand strap (3) is insert-
ed in mounting (1) on the device.
• As soon as the nipple is removed (e.g. because of the operator's stumbling and loosing the unit) with the
ROS 8 being in command, the following operations are initiated:
– the portable control unit is no longer in command,
– the gearboxes of both power trains receive the disengage command signal,
– the engines of both power trains are set to idling speed.

TIM-ID: 0000009186 - 001

50 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.2.2.6 RCS-6 – Main control stand and slave control stands
The controls for the various control stands are located on the main control stand and the slave control
stands (optional).
The Remote Interface Module RIM 2 for extension system RCS-HSG (optional) is located on the main control
stand.
The following control configurations are possible depending on the number of power trains:

Single-engine plant
Command unit ROS 15

Twin-engine plant
Variant 1: One command unit ROS 13–05
Variant 2: One command unit ROS 13–06
Variant 3: One Palm Beach command unit ROS 17

Triple-engine plant
Variant 1: One command unit ROS 16
Variant 2:
• One command unit ROS 15 for the middle shaft
• One command unit ROS 13 for the outer shafts

Four-engine plant
Two suitably configured and connected command units ROS 13 command units

Example: twin-engine plant with standard command unit

TIM-ID: 0000038457 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 51

 Item Description Explanation
A Engine room -
B Main control stand -
C Slave control stand 1 (Option)
1 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and command unit ROS 13,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
2 ROS 13 Command unit to control the outer power trains
3 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and command unit ROS 13,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
4 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
5 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)

Table 7: Twin-engine plant with standard command unit ROS 13

Example: twin-engine plant with Palm Beach command unit ROS 17

(alternative)

TIM-ID: 0000038457 - 005

52 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Description Explanation
A Engine room -
B Main control stand -
C Slave control stand 1 (Option)
1 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and command unit ROS 13,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
2 ROS 17 Command unit to control the outer power trains
3 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and command unit ROS 17,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
4 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
5 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)

Table 8: Twin-engine plant with Palm Beach command unit ROS 17

Example: twin-engine plant with standard command unit and portable control
unit ROS 8 (optional)
TIM-ID: 0000038457 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 53

 Item Description Explanation
A Engine room -
B Main control stand -
C Slave control stand 1 (Option)
1 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and command unit ROS 13,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
2 ROS 13 Command unit to control the outer power trains
3 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and command unit ROS 13,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
4 Connecting socket 1 Mobile control stand (optional);
for portable control unit ROS 8
5 ROS 8 Portable control unit (port/starboard), (optional)
6 Connecting socket 2 Mobile control stand (optional);
for portable control unit ROS 8 (port/starboard)
7 Connecting socket 3 Mobile control stand (optional);
for portable control unit ROS 8 (port/starboard)
8 Connecting socket 4 Mobile control stand (optional);
for portable control unit ROS 8 (port/starboard)
9 RIM 2 Remote Interface Module for extension system RCS-
HSG, (optional);
operating voltage and signals
10 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between cable W215 from ROS command unit in last
control stand of RCS line 1 (control stand 1, 3 or 5)
and Remote Interface Module RIM 2
11 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)
12 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)

Table 9: Twin-engine plant with standard command unit and portable control unit ROS 8
TIM-ID: 0000038457 - 005

54 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Example: Triple-engine plant with a combination of different propulsion
control levers

Item Description Explanation

A Engine room -
B Main control stand -
C Slave control stand 1 (Option)
1 CAN bus, CANopen (port) Between LOP and command unit ROS 13,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
2 ROS 13 Command unit to control the outer power trains
3 ROS 15 Command unit to control the middle power train
4 CAN bus, CANopen (middle power train) Between LOP and command unit ROS 15,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
5 CAN bus, CANopen (starboard) Between LOP and command unit ROS 13,
To further control stands (optional);
operating voltage and signals
TIM-ID: 0000038457 - 005

6 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);

Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (star-
board)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 55

 Item Description Explanation
7 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (middle
power train)
8 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
Central processing unit in the engine room (port)

Table 10: Triple-engine plant with a combination of different propulsion control levers

TIM-ID: 0000038457 - 005

56 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.3 Subsystems in the Engine Room
2.3.1 Central Processing Unit of the Subsystems

2.3.1.1 Signal paths on Local Operating Panel LOP

Signal paths on LOP

No. Connector Connection/interface

1 X11.1 Network On;
connection to further LOP
2 X11.2 Network On;
connection to further LOP
3 X20.1 Ethernet interface;
System bus connection to further LOP
Dialog interface
4 X20.2 Ethernet interface;
System bus connection to further LOP
TIM-ID: 0000040027 - 004

Dialog interface
5 X5 Connection to key switch (optional) on main control
stand
6 X5 CAN connection (J1939 / MCS-5) to MCS-6 of main
control stand;
to MCS-6 of slave control stands 2 and 4 (optional)
7 X5 CAN connection (CANopen) to RCS-6 of main control
stand;
to RCS-6 of slave control stands 2 and 4 (optional)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Subsystems in the Engine Room | 57

 No. Connector Connection/interface
8 X6 CAN connection (J1939 / MCS-5) to MCS-6 of slave
control stands 1, 3 and 5 (optional)
9 X6 CAN connection (CANopen) to RCS-6 of slave con-
trol stands 1, 3 and 5 (optional)
10 X9 MCS - I/O, CAN connection (J1939 / MCS-5)
11 X10 RCS - I/O, CAN connection (CANopen)
12 X7 Connection to emergency panel (optional)
13 X4 Connection to PPC (optional, Series 4000 only)
14 X4 Connection to EIM
15 X2 Connection to gearbox I/O;
gearbox sensors/actuators
16 X1 Connection to gearbox, classified
gearbox sensors/actuators
17 X3 Connection to ZF Trolling
18 X3 Connection to shaft speed sensor
19 X3 Connection to shaft speed sensor
20 X8 Connection to fuel prefilter 1
21 X8 Connection to fuel prefilter 2
22 X38 Connection to shipyard: Tank level
23 X37 Connection to shipyard: Relay 2
24 X36 Connection to shipyard: Relay 1
25 X35 Connection to shipyard: Opto 1
26 X34 Connection to shipyard: Opto 2
27 X32 Connection to shipyard: Non-MTU RCS(FRCS)
28 X31 Connection to shipyard: CAN NMEA-2000/RS422
29 X30 Connection to shipyard: Horn/flashing light
30 X41.2 GND power supply 2
31 X41.1 +24V power supply 2
32 X40.2 GND power supply 1
33 X40.1 +24V power supply 1

Table 11: Signal paths on LOP

Signals
Engine signals
Sensor signals
TIM-ID: 0000040027 - 004

• Acquisition by ECU
– Processing by ECU and EIM
– Transmission of evaluation results to LOP
Actuator signals
• Generation by ECU
• Tripped by
– LOP
– MCS-6
– RCS-6

58 | Central Processing Unit of the Subsystems | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Gearbox signals (except Trolling)
Sensor signals
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
Actuator signals
• Generation by LOP
• Transmission of evaluation results to gearbox
• Tripped by
– LOP
– MCS-6
– RCS-6

Gearbox signals for Trolling (if applicable)

Sensor signals
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
Actuator signals
• Generation by LOP
• Tripped by
– LOP
– MCS-6
– RCS-6

Remote monitoring signals (MCS-6)

Emergency stop signals from the control stands
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
• Processing by EIM and transmission to LOP
Other signals from the control stands
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
Signals to the control stands
• Generation by LOP

Remote control signals (RCS-6)

Signals from the control stands
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
Signals to the control stands
• Generation by LOP

Emergency stop signals

Tripped in ECU (e.g. limit value violation)
Tripped at LOP (by operator) or in LOP (e.g. limit value violation)
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
• Processing by EIM and transmission to LOP
TIM-ID: 0000040027 - 004

Tripped at control stand (by operator or MCS-6 / RCS-6)

• Acquisition and processing by LOP
• Processing by EIM and transmission to LOP
Tripped in plant (signal from outside MTU systems)
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
• Processing by EIM and transmission to LOP

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Central Processing Unit of the Subsystems | 59

 2.3.1.2 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Purpose
Local Operating Panel LOP 13

LOP = Local Operating Panel

Central processing unit in the engine room for the subsystems:
• Monitoring and Control System MCS-6
• Remote Control System RCS-6
• Engine Control System ECS-6
with the following features:
• Acquisition, evaluation, and display of power train process values.
• Data output at display units and indicators.
• Process control and process monitoring.
• Monitoring of limit values.
• Alarm generation in case of process faults.
• Key switch logic:
Switching on a propulsion plant with the MCS master key switch boots up the associated Local Operating
Panel LOP. (Master-Key-Switch)All Local Operating Panels are automatically booted in Standby mode on
multiple-shaft plants.
• In the event of inadmissible states and limit value violations: Initiation of power reduction, engine stop and
TIM-ID: 0000040028 - 002

emergency engine stop (configurable).

Operation via pushbuttons on control panel LOP-PAN for:
• Manual start interlock
• Engine start, engine stop, emergency engine stop
• Overspeed test
• Horn/flashing light off
Locking device to prevent inadvertent activation of the emergency engine stop or overspeed test

60 | Central Processing Unit of the Subsystems | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Display/indication on control panel LOP-PAN:
• Operating states of LOP-PAN
• Propulsion plant operating states
• Summary alarms:
– For warnings when operating at limits
– In case of inadmissible operating states
– In case of system faults
Indication on the service display of the integral Systembus Processing Unit SPU:
• Active alarms
• Device status indication
TIM-ID: 0000040028 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Central Processing Unit of the Subsystems | 61

 2.3.1.3 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

2.3.1.3.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Purpose

Local Operating Panel LOP 14

LOP = Local Operating Panel

Central processing unit in the engine room for the subsystems:
• Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 (Monitoring and Control System)
• Remote Control System RCS-6 (Remote Control System)
with the following features:
• Acquisition, evaluation, and display of power train process values.
• Data output at display units and indicators.
• Process control and process monitoring.
• Monitoring of limit values.
• Alarm generation in case of process faults.
• Key switch logic:
Switching on a propulsion plant with the MCS master key switch boots up the associated Local Operating
Panel LOP. (Master-Key-Switch)All Local Operating Panels are automatically booted in Standby mode on
multiple-shaft plants.
TIM-ID: 0000040029 - 003

• In the event of inadmissible states and limit value violations: Initiation of power reduction, engine stop and
emergency engine stop (configurable).

62 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Control in Local mode via pushbuttons:
• Activation/deactivation of Local mode
• Manual start interlock
• Engine start, engine stop, emergency engine stop
• Gearbox control
• Speed regulation
• Alarm acknowledgment
• Overspeed test
• Engine – Turning
Indication on the display of LOP 14:
• Operating states
• Fault information
• Help pages
Indication on the service display of the integral Systembus Processing Unit SPU:
• Active alarms
• Device status indication
TIM-ID: 0000040029 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 63

 2.3.2 Engine Control System ECS-6

2.3.2.1 ECS -6 – Overview

Subsystem ECS-6 with LOP

No. Designation Explanation

1 Subsystem ECS-6 Engine Control System
2 LOP 13; Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 60);
Optional LOP 14 optionally Local Operating Panel LOP 14
(→ Page 62);
central processing unit in the engine room
3 PPC (optional) Priming pump controller (→ Page 68);
for Series 4000 only
4 EIM 2 Engine interface (→ Page 65)
5 Interface Between LOP and gearbox sensors/actuators
6 Gearbox -
7 Engine -
TIM-ID: 0000038482 - 003

8 Interface Between ECU 7 and engine sensors/actuators (wir-

ing harness)
9 ECU 7 Engine Control Unit (→ Page 65)
10 CAN interface For dialog with Engine Control System ECS-6
11 Power supply Redundant input voltage for ECS-6

Table 12: ECS-6 overview

64 | Engine Control System ECS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.3.2.2 ECS-6 – Purpose of the units
Engine Interface Module EIM

EIM = Engine Interface Module

Central interface on the engine. Covers the entire minimum scope of a marine engine together with Engine
Control Unit ECU 7. Has no controls or parts requiring maintenance.
All engine signals integrated in the engine wiring harness.
• Start control (start repetition tooth-on-tooth, starter protection)
• Battery-charging generator monitoring
• Emergency stop function with line break monitoring
• Redundant power supply
• Optional control of emergency air-shutoff flaps
• Interface to Engine Control Unit ECU 7Motorregler ECU 7
• Control of an MTU Priming Pump Controller PPC
• Diagnosis via CAN interface for dialog unit
TIM-ID: 0000038483 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Engine Control System ECS-6 | 65

 Engine Control Unit ECU 7

ECU = Engine Control Unit

Central control and monitoring unit for the engine
• Implementation of MCS and RCS input signals at the engine.
• Control of injection system.
• Acquisition and evaluation of engine operating states.
• Monitoring of limit values.
• In the event of inadmissible states and limit value violations: Initiation of power reduction, engine stop and
emergency engine stop (configurable).
System communication via CAN bus
Self-monitoring
Diagnosis via CAN interface for dialog unit
TIM-ID: 0000038483 - 002

66 | Engine Control System ECS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.3.2.3 ECS -6 – Interaction of devices and signal paths
Power supply
Figure (→ Page 64)
Device Supply
LOP 13; Direct supply with redundant voltage from on-board
optionally LOP 14 power system
EIM 2 Direct supply with redundant voltage from on-board
power system
ECU 7 Power from EIM
PPC (optional) Control section: Power from EIM
Power section (for pump): 230 V to 440 V (depend-
ing on type of PPC)

Signals
Figure (→ Page 64)

Engine signals
Sensor signals
• Acquisition by ECU
– Processing by ECU and transmission of processed results to EIM
– Processing by EIM and transmission to LOP
Actuator signals
• Generation by ECU
• Tripped by
– LOP
– MCS-6
– RCS-6

Remote monitoring signals (MCS-6)

Emergency stop signals from the control stands
• Acquisition and processing by LOP
• Processing by EIM and transmission to LOP
• Command signal to ECU

Emergency stop signals

Tripped in ECU (e.g. limit value violation)
Tripped at LOP (by operator) or in LOP (e.g. limit value violation)
• Acquisition and processing by EIM
Tripped at control stand (by operator or MCS-6 / RCS-6)
TIM-ID: 0000038999 - 002

• Acquisition and processing by EIM

Tripped in plant (signal from outside MTU systems)
• Acquisition and processing by EIM

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Engine Control System ECS-6 | 67

 2.3.3 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

2.3.3.1 Priming Pump Controller PPC – Purpose

Priming Pump Controller PPC

1 Indicator lamp “Oil priming 2 Rotary switch for oil priming

pump ON” pump
PPC = Priming Pump Controller
Type PPC 5 to PPC 8, depending on AC input voltage peak value, frequency and number of phases
Switches the voltage for an oil priming pump via a contactor:
• Automatic or manual depending on switch setting
• Output voltage limitation, e.g. in case of pump failure
TIM-ID: 0000040030 - 001

68 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4 Technical Data
2.4.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Technical data
Designation Unit Value
Width mm 430
Height mm 383
Depth (inserted) mm 231
Cable clearance below bottom mm Approx. 350
Necessary clearance at front for mm 277.5
front panel door opening
Weight (without cables) kg 15.2
Installation position ° Wall-mounting vertical, connection block bottom
DC operating voltage V 24, +30% to -25%, residual ripple < 5%
Ambient temperature min. °C 0
Ambient temperature max. °C +65
Storage temperature, min. °C -25
Storage temperature, max. °C +70 / 2 h
Typ. DC power consumption A 3 (plus external consumers max. 50 ADC)
Shock resistance 15 g / 11 ms, semisinusoidal shock
Vibrostability Hz 5 to 13.2; Xpp = ±1.0 mm
13.2 to 100; a = 0.7 g (rms)
Relative air humidity % 0 to 96 / 55 °C, condensing
Protection DIN 40050 IP 55
EMI/EMC protection IEC60533:1999
IEC60092-504:2001
Grounding Required via grounding stud

Table 13: LOP 13 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000038581 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 69

 2.4.2 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Technical data
Designation Unit Value
Width mm 430
Height mm 383
Depth (inserted) mm 233
Cable clearance below bottom mm Approx. 350
Necessary clearance at front for mm 276
front panel door opening
Weight (without cables) kg 17.4
Installation position ° Wall-mounting vertical, connection block bottom
DC operating voltage V 24, +30% to -25%, residual ripple < 5%
Ambient temperature min. °C 0
Ambient temperature max. °C +65
Storage temperature, min. °C -25
Storage temperature, max. °C +70
Typ. DC power consumption A 3 (plus external consumers max. 50 ADC)
Shock resistance 15 g / 11 ms, semisinusoidal shock
Vibrostability Hz 5 to 13.2; Xpp = ±1.0 mm
13.2 to 100; a = 0.7 g (rms)
Relative air humidity % 0 to 96 / 55 °C, condensing
Protection DIN 40050 IP 55
EMI/EMC protection IEC60533:1999
IEC60092-504:2001
Grounding Required via grounding stud

Table 14: Technical dataLOP 14

TIM-ID: 0000038582 - 004

70 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.3 Control panel PAN 9 – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 69 x 267 x 84
Mass kg 0.6
Operating voltage VDC 10 to 32
Current consumption mA Iin (max.) approx. 335 (without ext. horn)
Iin (24 V) approx. 135 (without ext. horn)
Power consumption W 3.4
Degree of protection as per
IEC 60529
Above panel surface IP 66
Under panel surface IP 65
Ambient temperature °C -25 to +70
Storage temperature °C -25 to +70
Relative air humidity % Max. 95 at 55 °C (condensing)
Salt spray water-resistant as per Severity rating 1
EN60068-2-52
Shock resistance g 15, 11 ms semisinusoidal shock
Vibrostability as per
IEC 60068-2-6
5 Hz to 13.2 Hz mm ±1.0
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz g 0.7
Installation position ° 0 to 90
EMC protection IEC 60092-504: 2001
IEC 60533: 1999

Table 15: Control panel PAN 9 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000037512 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 71

 2.4.4 Display Basic DIS – Technical data
Description Unit Value
Width (mounting frame) mm 239
Height (mounting frame) mm 140
Depth (inserted) mm 66
Installation depth (inserted) be- mm 32
hind front panel
Required space behind front pan- mm Approx. 80
el
Installation opening mm 142 x 241
Weight (without cables) kg 1
Fitted position °C 0 to 90
Connection 2 x 23-pole cable connector
Material (housing) Plastic
Power supply voltage, min. VDC 6
Power supply voltage, max. VDC 32
Ambient temperature min. °C –40
Ambient temperature max. °C +85
Housing temperature max. °C +85
Storage temperature, min. °C –40
Storage temperature, max. °C +85
Current consumption mA 560 (without heating)
A 1.95 (with heating)
Shock resistance (SAEJ1455, g ±50 in three axes
section 4.10.4)
Vibrostability (SAEJ1455, section g 7.86 (5 to 2000 Hz) in three axes
4.9.4.1)
Relative air humidity, condensing % 5 to 100
Degree of protection (inserted) IP66
DIN 40050 front
Degree of protection (inserted) IP67
DIN 40050 back
Dielectric strength MΩ 10, to housing / voltage 24 V
EMC protection
• EN 61326-1
• EN 61000
• EN 60945
TIM-ID: 0000072757 - 001

EMI/EMC SAE J1113

• ISO 11452
• ISO 7637
• ISO 10605

Table 16: Display Basic DIS – Technical data

72 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.5 Display MFD – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Width (mounting frame) mm 247
Height (mounting frame) mm 151
Depth (inserted) mm 159
Installation depth (inserted) be- mm 145
hind front panel
Required space behind front pan- mm Approx. 190
el
Installation opening mm 223 x 127
Weight (without cables) kg 3.3
Installation position ° 0 to 90
Material (housing) PC-30GF, PET
Compass safety distance m 5

Table 17: General

Term Unit Value

Operating voltage, min. V 19.2
Operating voltage, max. V 32
Ambient temperature min. °C -25
Ambient temperature max. °C +70
Housing temperature max. °C +70
Storage temperature, min. °C -30
Storage temperature, max. °C +70
Power consumption max. at 19.2 A 1
VDC
Switching outputs kΩ/Ω 20kΩ<Rload<32Ω
Shock resistance (IEC 68–2–27) g 15, duration 11 ms
Vibrostability IEC 60068-2-6
Heat dissipation W Max. 18, typ. 12
Relative air humidity, condensing % 5 to 98

Table 18: Operating conditions

Term Unit Value

Degree of protection (inserted) IP66
DIN 40050 front
TIM-ID: 0000017636 - 002

Degree of protection (inserted) IP65

DIN 40050 back
Dielectric strength IEC MΩ >10 (50 VDC)
60092-504
ESD EN 61000-4-2: 2002 (IEC
61000-4-2)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 73

 Term Unit Value
EMC protection
• EN 61000-6-2: 2002 (CE)
• EN 61000-6-4: 2004 (CE)
• EN 50121-3-2: 2001 (Rail)
• EN 50155: 2004 (Rail)
• IEC 60533: 1999 (Marine)
Grounding necessary by means
of grounding strip
Mean time between failure h 20000
(MTBF), at 25 °C ambient tem-
perature

Table 19: Safety

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Compliance with the EMC limit values of the above-mentioned standard is based on the following prerequi-
sites:
• Only shielded bus cables are used. The inner shield must be applied to Pin 3 of the bus connector, the
outer shield must be connected to ship's ground.
• The grounding cable must not exceed 30 cm in length. The minimum cable section is 2.5 mm2.

TIM-ID: 0000017636 - 002

74 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.6 ECU 7 – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Housing material AlSi10Mg
Dimensions (length x width x mm 361 x 315 x 63
height)
Draw-out clearance (height) mm 135
Weight kg 5.5
(without cable connection)
Installation position As desired
Operating voltage VDC 20 to 32 (operation, injection without power reduction)
16.8 to 20 (operation, injection with power reduction)
11 to 16.8 (interactive mode, without injection)
(EN 50155; STANAG 1008)
Supply resistance Ω 0.25 (maximum)
(Ri, voltage source + Rline + Rcontact)
Current consumption A 0.2 to 17 (typ.)
24 (maximum, at 24 V DC)
5AppAC / 200 to 400 Hz
approx. 7 mA at ignition OFF
approx. 250 mA at ignition ON (without injection)
Heat dissipation W 35 (max.)
Grounding Required, by means of ground strap
EMC protection IEC 60533: 1999 (Marine)
EN 50121-3-2: 2001 (Rail)
EN 50155: 2004 (Rail)
EN 61000-6-2: 2002 (CE classification industrial)
EN 61000-6-4: 2004 (CE classification industrial)
EN 55025: 2003 (C&I international)
EN 13309: 2000 (C&I international)
DIN ISO 7637-2: 2002 (C&I international)
DIN ISO 7637-3: 1995 (C&I international)
Dielectric strength 10 MΩ (IEC 60092-504)
Utest ≥ 50 VDC (device removed for test)
500 V DC (EN 50155)
ESD protection EN 61000-4-2: 2002, IEC 61000-4-2 (CE, Rail and Marine)
ISO 10605: 2001 (C&I international)
Ambient temperature during op- °C –40 to +75
eration
Storage temperature range °C -40 to +85
Housing temperature °C 105 (maximum; for at most 30 min.)
TIM-ID: 0000016864 - 004

Relative air humidity % 0 to 95, condensing

Degree of protection Plugged in: IP69K (IEC 60529, DIN 40050)
Not plugged in: IP 20
With connector protective cap: IP 54
Shock resistance 15 g (duration 11 ms) (IEC 68-2-27)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 75

 Term Unit Value
Vibrostability 3.7 g*ms; 31.5 to 150 Hz 11 g peak (IEC 60068-2-6)
0.00057 g2/Hz at 5 Hz
0.06 g2/Hz at 31.5 Hz
0.06 g2/Hz at 150 Hz
0.00057 g2/Hz at 1000 Hz
0.00057 g2/Hz at 1500 Hz
MTBF h 20000 (at 75 °C ambient temperature)

Table 20: ECU 7 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000016864 - 004

76 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.7 EIM 2 – Technical data
Dimensions (length x width x 254 mm x 193 mm x 103 mm
height)
Draw-out clearance upwards 157 mm
Draw-out clearance in longitudinal Max. 100 mm
direction
Weight 4.4 kg
Power consumption 0.12 to 40 A
(without starter)
Heat dissipation Max. 25 W
Operating voltage 16 to 32 VDC (operation) (STANAG 1008, Ed. 9 : 2004) (Marine, on-
board genset)
16 to 32 VDC (operation) (DIN EN 50155 : 2004) (Rail)
12 to 16.8 VDC (dialog)
Supply impedance 0.15 Ω
Ri(power source) + Rcable
Grounding Required, via ground strap
EMC protection IEC 60533: 1999 (Marine)
DIN EN 50121-3-2 : 2007 (Rail)
DIN EN 50155 : 2004 (Rail)
DIN EN 61000-6-2 : 2006 (CE classification industrial/immunity)
DIN EN 61000-6-4 : 2007 (CE classification industrial/emissions)
Insulation resistance IEC 60092-504 : 2001
Ri > 10 MΩ (IEC 60092-504
Utest = 50 VDC
Operational ambient temperature –30 to +85 °C
Storage temperature –40 to +85 °C
Relative air humidity 0 to 95 %, condensing
Shock resistance 15 g / 11 ms, half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability
5 to 25 Hz xpp = ± 1.6 mm
25 to 100 Hz a = ±4 g
Degree of protection EIM 2-02: IP 10 as per IEC 60529 / DIN 40050
EIM 2-03: IP 55 as per IEC 60529 / DIN 40050
Installation position As desired

Table 21: EIM 2 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000020235 - 006

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 77

 2.4.8 PPC – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Dimensions (length x width x mm Approx. 280 x 200 x 136
height)
Draw-out clearance (longitudinal mm Approx. 125
direction)
Weight kg Approx. 3.5
(without cable connection)
Installation position As desired
Operational ambient temperature °C –25 to +55
Storage temperature °C -35 to +70
Relative air humidity % 0 to 95, condensing
Degree of protection IP 65 (DIN 40050)
Shock resistance 10 g (semi-sinusoidal shock, duration 11 ms)
Vibrostability 2 to 12.8 Hz: xpp = 3 mm
12.8 to 100 Hz: a = ± 1 g
EMC protection IEC 801
Operating voltage (PPC) VDC 24; +30% / –25%
PPC 5
Oil priming pump operating volt- 3-phase, 400 V, 50 Hz
age
Oil priming pump power W 750
Oil priming pump rated current A 2.0
PPC 6
Oil priming pump operating volt- 1-phase, 230 V, 50 Hz
age
Oil priming pump power W 1100
Oil priming pump rated current A 7.5
PPC 7
Oil priming pump operating volt- 3-phase, 230 V, 60 Hz
age
Oil priming pump power W 900
Oil priming pump rated current A 4.0
PPC 8
Oil priming pump operating volt- 3-phase, 440 V, 60 Hz
age
Oil priming pump power W 900
TIM-ID: 0000016795 - 006

Oil priming pump rated current A 2.0

Table 22: PPC – Technical data

78 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.9 ROS 13–05 – Technical data
Description Unit Value
Type/variant ROS 13–05
Dimensions (L x B x H) mm Approx. 65 x 125 x 219
Height above console surface mm Max. 157
Installation opening mm 70 x 50 (with fixing plate)
Ground kg 1.32
Color Chromium-plated
Propulsion control lever Matt black
Housing Black, 6 keys in chrome
Keyboard
Control lever position adjusting ° -70 to +70 (relative to neutral position)
range
Control lever position engage- ° -15 to +15 (relative to neutral position)
ment locks
Fitted position Any
Power supply VDC 9 to 36
Current consumption mA 2 x 75 at 24 V
Max. 2 x 200 at 9 V
Control lever n Braking in every position
Breakaway force (engagement n 20 ± 5
force) 12 ± 5
Adjusting force
Storage temperature °C –25 to +70
Operational ambient temperature °C –25 to +70
Relative air humidity % 5 to 98, condensation possible
Degree of protection above and IP 66 DIN VDE 0470
below panel plate
Shock resistance g 10/11 ms, half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz: xpp = ±1 mm
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: a= 0.7 g
CAN standard ISO 11898
EMI/EMC EN 61000-6-2
(in conjunction with MTU system EN 61000–6–4
scopes / MTU components) EN 60533
Salt spray test EN 60068-2-52, test Kb

Table 23: ROS 13–05 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000072760 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 79

 2.4.10 ROS 13–06 – Technical data
Description Unit Value
Type/variant ROS 13–06
Dimensions (L x B x H) mm Approx. 65 x 125 x 189
Height above console surface mm Max. 127
Installation opening mm 70 x 50 (with fixing plate)
Ground kg 2.1
Color Chromium-plated
Propulsion control lever Matt black
Housing Black, 6 keys in chrome
Keyboard
Control lever position adjusting ° -70 to +70 (relative to neutral position)
range
Control lever position engage- ° -15 to +15 (relative to neutral position)
ment locks
Fitted position Any
Power supply VDC 9 to 36
Current consumption mA 2 x 75 at 24 V
Max. 2 x 200 at 9 V
Control lever n Braking in every position
Breakaway force (engagement n 28 ± 5
force) 17 ± 5
Adjusting force
Storage temperature °C –25 to +70
Operational ambient temperature °C –25 to +70
Relative air humidity % 5 to 98, condensation possible
Degree of protection above and IP 66 DIN VDE 0470
below panel plate
Shock resistance g 10/11 ms, half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz: xpp = ±1 mm
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: a= 0.7 g
CAN standard ISO 11898
EMI/EMC EN 61000-6-2
(in conjunction with MTU system EN 61000–6–4
scopes / MTU components) EN 60533
Salt spray test EN 60068-2-52, test Kb

Table 24: ROS 13–06 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000072761 - 001

80 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.11 ROS 15 – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Type/variant ROS 15-01
Dimensions (L x B x H) mm Approx. 65 x 125 x 219
Height above console surface mm Max. 157
Installation opening mm 70 x 50 (with fixing plate)
Mass kg 1.32
Color: Chromium-plated
Propulsion control lever Matt black
Housing Black, 6 keys in chrome
Keyboard
Control lever position adjusting ° -70 to +70 (relative to neutral position)
range
Control lever position engage- ° -15 to +15 (relative to neutral position)
ment locks
Installation position As desired
Operating voltage VDC 9 to 36
Power consumption mA 1 x 75 at 24 V
Max. 1 x 200 at 9 V
Dielectric strength V AC 500
Dielectric strength MΩ >10 (at test voltage 500 VDC)
Control lever N Braking in every position
Breakaway force (engagement N 20 ± 5
force) 12 ± 5
Adjusting force
Storage temperature °C -25 to +70
Operational ambient temperature °C -25 to +70
Relative air humidity % 5 to 98, condensation possible
Degree of protection above and IP 66 DIN VDE 0470
below panel plate
Shock resistance g 10/11 ms, half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability 2 Hz - 13.2 Hz xpp = ±1 mm
13.2 Hz - 100 Hz: a= 0.7 g
CAN standard ISO 11898
EMI/EMC protection DIN EN 61000-6-2
EN 60533

Table 25: ROS 15 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000039871 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 81

 2.4.12 ROS 16 – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Type/variant ROS 16-01
Dimensions (L x W x H) mm Approx. 65 x 235 x 219
Height above console surface mm Max. 165
Installation opening mm Approx. 200 x 50 (for installation with mounting brackets)
Mass kg 3.5
Color: Chromium-plated
Propulsion control lever Matt black
Housing Black, 6 keys in chrome
Keyboard
Control lever position adjusting ° -70 to +70 (relative to neutral position)
range
Control lever position engage- ° -15 to +15 (relative to neutral position)
ment locks
Installation position As desired
Operating voltage VDC 9 to 36
Power consumption mA 3 x 75 at 24 V
Max. 3 x 200 at 9 V
Dielectric strength V AC 500
Dielectric strength MΩ >10 (at test voltage 500 VDC)
Control lever N Braking in every position
Breakaway force (engagement N 20 ± 5
force) 12 ± 5
Adjusting force
Storage temperature °C -25 to +70
Operational ambient temperature °C -25 to +70
Relative air humidity % 5 to 98, condensation possible
Degree of protection above and IP 66 DIN VDE 0470
below panel plate
Shock resistance g 10/11 ms, half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability 5 Hz - 25 Hz: xpp = ±1 mm
25 Hz - 100 Hz: a= 0.7 g
CAN standard ISO 11898
EMI/EMC protection DIN EN 61000-6-2
EN 60533

Table 26: ROS 16 – Technical data

TIM-ID: 0000039872 - 002

82 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.13 ROS 17 – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Type/variant ROS 17
Dimensions (L x W x H) mm Approx. 163 x 65 80 179 x 106
Height above console surface mm Max. 231 (with MTU lever)
Installation opening mm 118 x 50 (with mounting plate); Ø24
Mass kg Approx. 6.0 (1x control unit, 2x command unit, 2x cable)
Propulsion control lever color Chromium-plated
Command unit control panel Black, 6 keys in chrome
Propulsion control lever adjusting ° -70 to +70 (relative to neutral position)
range
Propulsion control lever engage- ° -15 to +15 (relative to neutral position)
ment locks
Installation position As desired
Operating voltage VDC 9 to 36
Power consumption mA 2 x 75 at 24 V
Max. 2x 200 at 9 V
Dielectric strength V AC >550
Dielectric strength MΩ >10 (at test voltage 500 VDC)
Control lever N Braking in every position
Breakaway force (engagement N 20 ± 3
force) 12 ± 3
Adjusting force
Storage temperature °C -25 to +70
Operational ambient temperature °C -25 to +70
Relative air humidity °C/% 55 to 96, condensation possible
Degree of protection above and IP 66 DIN VDE 0470
below panel plate
Shock resistance g 10/11 ms, half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability 2 Hz - 13.2 Hz: xpp = ±1 g
CAN standard ISO 11898
EMI/EMC protection DIN EN 61000-6-2
EN 60533

Table 27: Technical data ROS 17

TIM-ID: 0000052850 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 83

 2.4.14 RIM 2 – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Dimensions (L x B x H) mm 340 x 150 x 90 (with mounting lugs)
Weight kg 2.6
Color RAL 5002 (blue)
Installation position Vertical, cable opening at bottom
Connection Prefabricated cables with Phoenix plug connectors, se-
cured with locking screws
Operating voltage VDC 24 (+30%, -25%)
Power consumption mA Max. 500
Storage temperature °C -10 to +70
Operational ambient temperature °C 0 to +55
Relative air humidity % 5 to 95, non-condensing
Protection DIN 40 050 IP 23
Shock resistance g 15 half-sine shock, duration 11 ms
Vibrostability Hz 2 to 12.8: xpp = 1.5 mm
12.8 to 100: a = ±1 g
EMI/EMC protection EN 50081-2/ EN 50082-2

TIM-ID: 0000038659 - 001

84 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2.4.15 ROS 8 – Technical data
Term Unit Value
Dimensions in neutral setting (L x mm 190 x 110 x 100
W x H)
Length of cable to connecting m 10
point
Control lever position adjusting °C -45 to +45 (relative to neutral position)
range
Control lever position engage- °C At 0 (relative to neutral position)
ment locks
Connection 7-pole cable connector
Operating voltage VDC 24 (+30%; -25%), residual ripple less than 5%
Power consumption mA Max. 500
Storage temperature ° -25 to +70
Operational ambient temperature ° -25 to +70
Relative air humidity % 0 to 98, condensation admissible
Degree of protection IP 66
Shock resistance g 50/6 ms, half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability Hz 5 to 13.2: xpp = ±1 mm
13.2 to 100: a = 0.7 g ±1 g
EMI/EMC protection EN 50081-2; EN 50082-2
Weight kg 1.4 (with cable)
Color Black grey RAL7021
TIM-ID: 0000038660 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Technical Data | 85

 2.4.16 Emergency Panel – Technical data
Technical data
Description Unit Value
Ambient temperature °C -25 to +70
Storage temperature °C -25 to +70
Relative air humidity % 0 to 96; condensing
Heat dissipation W Max. 10
Housing fixture - Console installation
Degree of protection (front) IP IP56 DIN EN 60529
Shock resistance g/ms 15/11 half-sine shock pulse
Vibrostability - DIN EN 60068-2-6
EMC - DIN EN 55011:04/2011
DIN IEC 60533:11
DIN EN 61000-4-2:12/2009
DIN EN 61000-4-3:04/2011
DIN EN 61000-4-4:04/2013
DIN EN 61000-4-5:03/2015
DIN EN 61000-4-5:03/2015
DIN EN 61000-4-6:08/2014
DIN EN 61000-4-17:047/2005
DIN EN 61000-4-29:12/2001
IEC 60092–504:03/2001
STANAG 1008 Edition 9:2004
Salt-spray resistant - EN 60068-2-52; Severity
Insulation resistance Mohm >10 (50 VDC)
Power supply VDC 18 to 32
Current consumption mA, V Active typ. 115 mA, 24 V
Operational (= Standby) typ. 19 mA, 24 V
Power consumption W Max. 10
Grounding - Via ground straps at the rear of the Emergency Panel:
1. With blade terminal X1.1 from connecting cable X1 to
the ground straps
2. Separate connection to system ground (length ≤
1.5 m, cross section ≥ 4 mm2)
Safety distance from magnet m 5
Steering compass
Weight (without cabling) kg Approx. 0.4 (without retaining frame)
Flammablity as per UL - Housing / foil carrier: HB
Housing material - Base: Ultradur S40/90 (PBT ASA-GF 30% +/-x%)
TIM-ID: 0000068087 - 001

Molded housing: Grilamit LV - 3H (PAI2 30% +/- x% GF)

Slide: PMMA Plexiglas HW 55LE

86 | Technical Data | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3 Operating Instructions
3.1 Indicators and Controls on the Control Stand
3.1.1 Monitoring and Control System MCS-6

3.1.1.1 MCS-6 – Indicators and controls

The arrangement of the controls depends on the specific design of the control stand concerned.

Item Designation Meaning/function MCS SCS

Basic DIS X X
1 Function keys To operate the on-screen user interface.
2 LC display Display of:
• Power train operating states
• Alarms
TIM-ID: 0000038485 - 002

Start/Stop PAN X X
3 LED Display of:
• Power train operating states
• Alarms

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating Instructions | 87

 Item Designation Meaning/function MCS SCS
4 Pushbuttons Operation of the propulsion plant:
• CONTROL ACTIVE / LAMP TEST
• START
• STOP
• COMBINED ALARM / HORN OFF
• OVERRIDE
• EMERGENCY STOP
5 Transparent sliding lock To prevent inadvertent actuation of the “OVER-
RIDE” and “EMERGENCY STOP” pushbuttons.
6 Utility lamp Indication of operating states of the Start/Stop
PAN control panel

7 Alarm horn (optional) Audible alarm signaling. X X

8 Key switch () (optional) To switch the entire system on/off. X

Table 28: MCS-6 indicators and controls

MCS-6 – Analog display instruments

TIM-ID: 0000038485 - 002

Item Designation Meaning/function MCS SCS

1 Display instrument Indicates gear oil temperature X X
2 Display instrument Indicates gear control oil pressure X X
3 Display instrument Indicates Engine speed with display for ad- X X
ditional indication of measured values and
alarms

88 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Designation Meaning/function MCS SCS
4 Display instrument Indicates engine coolant temperature X X
5 Display instrument Indicates engine lube oil pressure X X

Table 29: MCS-6 – Analog display instruments

TIM-ID: 0000038485 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 89

 3.1.1.2 Control panel Start/Stop PAN – Indicators and controls
When configured as a Start/Stop PAN, control panel PAN 9 features a locking device to prevent inadvertent
actuation of the EMERGENCY STOP (6) and OVERRIDE (5) pushbuttons. To access the EMERGENCY STOP (6)
and OVERRIDE (5) pushbuttons, slide the locking device over the STOP (3) and COMBINED ALARM / HORN
OFF (4) pushbuttons.

Pushbutton functions

No. Labeling Function

1 CONTROL ACTIVE Pressing the pushbutton initiates the lamp test.
LAMP TEST
2 START Pressing the pushbutton initiates the automatic
starting sequence; only possible when LED CON-
TROL ACTIVE / LAMP TEST is lit green.
3 STOP Pressing the pushbutton initiates the stopping se-
quence.
4 COMBINED ALARM Pressing the pushbutton switches the horn off.
HORN OFF
TIM-ID: 0000038479 - 005

5 OVERRIDE Pressing the pushbutton overrides the engine safety

system.
6 EMERGENCY STOP Pressing the pushbutton initiates an emergency
stop.
7 - Transparent slide to prevent inadvertent actuation of
the OVERRIDE (5) and EMERGENCY STOP (6) push-
buttons.

Table 30: Start/Stop PAN – Pushbutton functions

90 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 LED status indicators

No. Labeling LED color LED state Meaning

1 CONTROL ACTIVE Green Lit Control stand active. Start possible.
LAMP TEST Yellow Lit Control stand active. No start possible
because start interlock is pending.
– Dark Control stand inactive.
2 START White Flashing Starting sequence started, starter not
activated.
Lit Starter ON.
– Dark –
3 STOP White Flashing Stopping sequence running.
Lit Stop command applied with engine at
standstill.
– Dark –
4 COMBINED ALARM Yellow Flashing Acknowledged yellow alarm present.
HORN OFF Yellow Lit Unacknowledged yellow alarm applied.
TIM-ID: 0000038479 - 005

Red Flashing Unacknowledged red alarm applied.

Red Lit Acknowledged red alarm present.
– Dark No alarm is applied.
5 OVERRIDE Red Lit Safety system override is active.
– Dark Safety system override is not active.
6 EMERGENCY STOP Red Lit Emergency stop is active.
– Dark Emergency stop is not active.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 91

 No. Labeling LED color LED state Meaning
7 Utility lamp Blue Lit Supply voltage applied, normal opera-
tion.
Slow flashing (2 Supply voltage applied, system booting,
Hz) no connection to controller, CAN com-
munication error or unsuccessful auto-
matic node number allocation.
Rapid flash- Supply voltage applied, system not
ing (8 Hz) booting, fatal error
Red Slow flashing (2 LEDs 1 to 3 off: “Unable to allocate
Hz) node number” state active.
LEDs 1 to 3 flashing: “Display node
number” state active.
– Dark Supply voltage low or missing.

Table 31: Start/Stop PAN – LED status indicators

The LEDs indicate propulsion plant operating states or combined alarms.

The utility lamp indicates the operating states of the Start/Stop PAN.

TIM-ID: 0000038479 - 005

92 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.1.3 Display Basic DIS – Display and controls

Item Description Meaning/function

1 Central display area Display of various screen pages
2 Function keys to operate the screen pages Assignment changes depending on the screen page
currently on display
3 Function key Confirms inputs, acknowledges alarms
4 Function key Opens key assignment, displays the main menu

Table 32: Display Basic DIS – Display and controls

Function key operation

Information about the operating states of the power train and the fully integrated electronic system can be
retrieved and edited on various screen pages on the display (1). The screen pages are arranged in a hierarch-
ical order.
The display (1) is operated by means of five keys respectively on the right (2, 3) and left (2, 4) sides of the
display (1). The functions of the four upper left (2) and right (2) keys change depending on the screen page
currently on display. Their present function is indicated by symbols on the right and left edges of the screen.
TIM-ID: 0000038486 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 93

 Pushbutton assignment

1 Horn off 5 Reset display 9 Menu

2 Scroll page up 6 Astern 10 Enter
3 Alarm overview 7 Day/night mode
4 Scroll page down 8 Continue

Additional pushbutton functions

1 Menu:
• Opens key assignment
• Opens main menu
(hold down for min 2 sec.).
2 Enter key:
• Confirms selection
3 Function keys:
• Navigation through the menu struc-
ture
• Parameter selection
TIM-ID: 0000038486 - 003

Screen page representation

The screen pages can be represented individually. The values and operating states displayed depend on the
respective configuration of the system.

94 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.1.4 Display Basic DIS – Overview of the screen pages
Screen layout

1 Screen page designation 7 Yellow alarm active 13 Battery voltage

2 Gearbox state 8 Date/time or active alarm 14 Engine load
3 Local/Remote display display 15 Fuel pressure after filter
4 Override active 9 Limit value display 16 Exhaust turbocharger active
5 Power reduction active 10 Fuel consumption
6 Red alarm active 11 Speed demand
12 Operating hours
TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 95

 Help display for pushbutton assignment

1 Horn off 5 Reset display 9 Menu

2 Scroll page up 6 Astern 10 Enter
3 Alarm overview 7 Day/night mode
4 Scroll page down 8 Continue
Pressing pushbutton (9) “Menu” displays the assignment of the pushbuttons.
Note: The dialog window closes automatically after 5 sec.

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

96 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Day/night mode

Change by pressing pushbutton (7) “Day/Night” .

Display and instrument brightness

Pressing pushbutton (7) “Day/Night” (→ Page 96) for longer than 2 sec. opens the window to adjust display/
instrument brightness.
TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 97

 The following functions are available:
• Regulation of the display with keys (2) and (4)
• Regulation of the instruments with keys (6) and (8)
Note: The keys are also dimmed .
• Press pushbutton (7) “Day/Night” again to reset the dimming function
• Press keys “Preset 1” (3) or “Preset 2” (5) for longer than 2 sec. to save the dimming settings

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

98 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Screen pages
Digital View 3 (Default)

Digital View 2
TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 99

 Digital View 1

Digital View 1 (Night mode)

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

100 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Measuring-point list
Open the page with pushbuttons (2) “Up” and (4) “Down” (→ Page 96).

Alarm Page
Opens on pressing pushbutton (3) “Alarm overview” (→ Page 96).
Note: This only opens when an alarm is pending.
TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 101

 The following functions are available:
• Silencing the horn by pressing pushbutton (1) “Horn off”
• Scrolling through the Alarm list with pushbuttons (6) “Back” and (8) “Forwards”
• Acknowledging alarms with pushbutton (10) “Enter”
• Opening an alarm description by pressing pushbutton (2) “Help”

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

102 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Opening alarm description

Return with pushbutton (3)

Main menu
Opens on pressing pushbutton (9) “Menu” (→ Page 96) for longer than 2 sec.
TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 103

 1 Screen page display 3 Engine diagnosis 7 Customer settings
2 Help menu display for ab- 5 Reset engine diagnostics 9 Menu
breviations

Main menu User settings

Opens on pressing pushbutton (7) “User settings” in the main menu (→ Page 103).

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

104 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Settings can be made as follows:
• Select settings with pushbuttons (2) “Up” and (4) “Down”
• Select values with pushbuttons (8) “Down” and (6) “Up”
• Save values with pushbutton (7) and confirm changed values with pushbutton (10) “Enter”
• Return to main menu with pushbutton (9) “Menu”

Main menu Engine diagnostics

Opens on pressing pushbutton (3) “Engine diagnostics” in the main menu (→ Page 103).
TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 105

 Scroll through the list with the pushbuttons (4) “Up” and “Down” (6).
Note: Alarms are not listed in chronological order.

System settings
Open the main menu first to make system settings.
The “hidden” menu is displayed on pressing pushbuttons (4) and (6) (→ Page 96) twice consecutively.

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

106 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Pressing pushbutton (1) opens the system settings.

System settings menu

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 107

 Settings can be made as follows:
• Select settings with pushbuttons (2) “Up” and (4) “Down”
• Select values with pushbuttons (8) “Down” and (6) “Up”

Help menu for abbreviations

Open by pressing pushbutton (2) “Help” in the main menu (→ Page 103).

TIM-ID: 0000053102 - 002

108 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.1.5 Engine speed instrument – Display overview
Speed instrument
1 Pushbuttons
2 Display

Speed instrument display

The display shows additional information.

Display overview
TIM-ID: 0000053103 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 109

 Hour display
1 Go to Hour Page:
• Press both pushbuttons for longer
than 5 sec.
The internal trip time (1) is reset.

Display setup
1 Go to Setup Page:
• Press both pushbuttons for longer
than 5 sec.
2 Submenu opens:
• Left key: toggle
• Right key: change value
3 Submenu Language
4 Submenu Unit

TIM-ID: 0000053103 - 002

110 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Dimming display
Note: The changed dimming value is imme-
diately reset to the central default
dimming value set be the system. The
dimming value cannot be permanently
adjusted with this dimming display.

Contrast display
1 Go to Dimming Page:
• Press both pushbuttons for longer
than 5 sec.
2 Submenu Contrast:
• Left key: Decrease value
• Right key: Increase value
• Close submenu:
– Press both pushbuttons for lon-
ger than 5 sec.
TIM-ID: 0000053103 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | 111

 FAULT display
1 Go to Fault Page:
• Press both pushbuttons for longer
than 5 sec.
2 Submenu opens:
• Left key: toggle
• Right key: change value
• Close submenu:
– Press both pushbuttons for lon-
ger than 5 sec.

FAULT display contents

1 SPN
2 FMI
3 Number of alarms
4 Alarm no.
5 OC - occurrence counter

TIM-ID: 0000053103 - 002

112 | Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.1.6 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

3.1.1.6.1 Display MFD – Display and controls

Item Designation Meaning/function

1 Central display area Display of various screen pages
2 Key assignment for function keys 1 to 5 Indicates current key assignment of screen page on
(from top to bottom) display.

Table 33: Display MFD – Display and controls

Function key operation

Information on the operating statuses of the associated drive train can be retrieved on the display (1) on
different screen pages. The screen pages are arranged in a hierarchical order.
The display is operated by means of five buttons (2) on the right of the display. Their respective functions
vary depending on the screen pages.
Their present function is indicated by symbols on the right edge of the screen.
TIM-ID: 0000038487 - 003

Key assignment
Navigation through the menu structure and parameter selection.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 113

 1 Opens and closes Alarm 3 Scrolls one page down 5 Alarm acknowledgment
page 4 Day/night mode
2 Scrolls one page up

Screen page representation

The screen pages can be represented individually. The values and operating states displayed depend on the
respective configuration of the system.

To open the Overview page: Press and hold down both keys (2) and (3).

TIM-ID: 0000038487 - 003

114 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.1.6.2 Display MFD ‒ Overview of screen pages
Screen layout

1 Gear oil temperature / oil 4 Battery voltage 7 Remote/Local display

pressure 5 Alarm indicator (yellow and 8 Message window
2 Gearbox status / Trolling red alarm)
active 6 Limit value display
3 Priming active

Sub-menus
1 Switch languages
2 Change input values
3 Scroll up and down
4 Confirm selection
TIM-ID: 0000053108 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 115

 Overview page
Press and hold down keys (2) and (3) (→ Page 113) to open.

Day/night display
Change by pressing button (4) “Day/Night” (→ Page 113).

TIM-ID: 0000053108 - 001

116 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Display and instrument brightness
Change by holding down key (4 ) “Day/Night” (→ Page 113) for more than 2 sec.
TIM-ID: 0000053108 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 117

 High-contrast view

Opening Alarm page

Open by pressing key Taste (1) (→ Page 113).

TIM-ID: 0000053108 - 001

118 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 • Flashing yellow: Unacknowledged yellow alarm
• Flashing red: Unacknowledged red alarm

Opening Measuring point list

Select with keys (2) and (3) (→ Page 113).

Opening Customer settings

Select with keys (2) and (3) (→ Page 113).
TIM-ID: 0000053108 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 119

 TIM-ID: 0000053108 - 001

120 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.2 Remote Control System RCS-6

3.1.2.1 Command unit ROS 15 for one shaft

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 Propulsion control lever • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
set the engine speed for the port engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the port gear-
box.
2 CMD LED LED lights up when the CMD pushbutton is pressed.
3 CMD pushbutton • Key to select the commanding control stand.
• Pushbutton to acknowledge the horn of the com-
mand unit.
• Pushbutton to activate the warm-up function.
4 COMMAND LED This LED is not assigned on the ROS 15 command
unit for one shaft.
5 SCRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SMART CRUISING mode.
6 COMMAND LED • LED flashes slowly when initial command of the
TIM-ID: 0000039873 - 004

starboard power train can be assumed.

• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-
mand of the starboard power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
7 CRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate CRUISING mode.
8 CRS LED • LED flashes when the engine speed has been lim-
ited due to mode change TRL → CRS.
• LED flashes when CRUISING mode is active.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 121

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
9 Ahead mark The gearbox is engaged ahead when the pointer (22,
23) is level with or past this mark (not when the
warm-up function is active).
10 Neutral LED LED lights up when the pointer (22, 23) is level with
this mark.
The gearbox is disengaged (or will be disengaged).
11 SCRS LED LED flashes when SMART CRUISE mode is active.
12 Astern mark The gearbox is engaged astern when the pointer (22,
23) is level with or past this mark (not when the
warm-up function is active).
13 TRL LED LED flashes when TROLLING mode is active.
14 TRL pushbutton Pushbutton to activate TROLLING mode.
15 Alarm LED • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
16 SYNC pushbutton No function
17 Alarm LED This LED is not assigned on the ROS 15 command
unit for one shaft.
18 AUX pushbutton Pushbutton to activate an additional function. (→ In-
stallation and Commissioning Instructions)
19 AUX LED LED lights up when additional function is active.
20 SYNC LED No function
21 Neutral LED This LED is not assigned on the ROS 15 command
unit for one shaft.
22 Pointer The position of the pointer indicates the gearbox
state (not when the warm-up function is active).
23 Pointer The position of the pointer indicates the gearbox
state (not when the warm-up function is active).

Table 34: Command unit ROS 15 – Controls and indicators

TIM-ID: 0000039873 - 004

122 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.2.2 Command unit ROS 13 for two shafts

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 Port propulsion control lever • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
set the engine speed for the port engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the port gear-
box.
2 Starboard propulsion control lever • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
set the engine speed for the starboard engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the starboard
gearbox.
3 CMD LED LED lights up when the CMD pushbutton is pressed.
4 CMD pushbutton • Pushbutton to select the commanding control
stand.
• Pushbutton to acknowledge the horn of the com-
mand unit.
• Pushbutton to activate the warm-up function.
5 COMMAND LED port • LED flashes when command of the port power
train can be assumed.
TIM-ID: 0000038460 - 003

• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-

mand of the port power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
6 SCRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SMART CRUISING mode.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 123

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
7 COMMAND LED starboard • LED flashes slowly when command of the star-
board power train can be assumed.
• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-
mand of the starboard power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
8 CRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate CRUISING mode.
9 CRS LED • LED flashes when the engine speed has been lim-
ited due to mode change TRL → CRS.
• LED flashes when CRUISING mode is active.
10 Ahead mark The gearbox is engaged ahead when the pointer (23,
24) is level with or past this mark (not when the
warm-up function is active).
11 Neutral LED starboard LED lights up when the pointer (23) is at the level of
this marking.
The starboard gear is disengaged (or will be disen-
gaged).
12 SCRS LED LED flashes when SMART CRUISE mode is active.
13 Astern mark The gearbox is engaged astern when the pointer (23,
24) is level with or past this mark (not when the
warm-up function is active).
14 TRL LED LED flashes when TROLLING mode is active.
15 TRL pushbutton Pushbutton to activate TROLLING mode.
16 Alarm LED starboard • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the starboard RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
17 SYNC pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion.
18 Alarm LED port • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the port RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
19 AUX pushbutton Pushbutton to activate an additional function. (→ In-
stallation and Commissioning Instructions)
20 AUX LED LED lights up when additional function is active.
21 SYNC LED LED lights up when the SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion is active.
22 Neutral LED port • LED lights up when the pointer (24) is at the level
of this marking.
• The port gear is disengaged (or will be disengag-
TIM-ID: 0000038460 - 003

ed).
23 Starboard pointer The position of the pointer indicates the starboard
gearbox state (not when the warm-up function is ac-
tive).
24 Pointer port The position of the pointer indicates the port gear-
box state (not when the warm-up function is active).

Table 35: Command unit ROS 13 – Controls and indicators

124 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.2.3 Command unit ROS 17 for two shafts

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 Port propulsion control lever Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
set the engine speed for the port engine.
2 Port bow thruster pushbutton (optional) Pushbutton to control the bow thruster (if provided
by the shipyard and wired accordingly)
3 Starboard propulsion control lever Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
set the engine speed for the starboard engine.
4 Starboard bow thruster pushbutton (option- Pushbutton to control the bow thruster (if provided
al) by the shipyard and wired accordingly)
5 CMD LED LED lights up when the CMD pushbutton is pressed.
6 CMD pushbutton • Key to select the commanding control stand.
• Pushbutton to acknowledge the horn of the com-
mand unit.
• Pushbutton to activate the warm-up function.
7 COMMAND LED port • LED flashes when command of the port power
train can be assumed.
TIM-ID: 0000052851 - 002

• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-

mand of the port power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
8 SCRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SMART CRUISING mode.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 125

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
9 COMMAND LED starboard • LED flashes slowly when command of the star-
board power train can be assumed.
• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-
mand of the starboard power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
10 CRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate CRUISING mode.
11 CRS LED • LED flashes when the engine speed has been lim-
ited due to mode change TRL → CRS.
• LED flashes when CRUISING mode is active.
12 Neutral LED starboard LED lights up when the pointer (23) is at the level of
this marking.
The starboard gear is disengaged (or will be disen-
gaged).
13 SCRS LED LED flashes when SMART CRUISE mode is active.
14 TRL LED LED flashes when TROLLING mode is active.
15 TRL pushbutton Pushbutton to activate TROLLING mode
16 Alarm LED starboard • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the starboard RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
17 SYNC pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion.
18 Alarm LED port • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the port RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
19 AUX pushbutton Pushbutton to activate an additional function. (→ In-
stallation and Commissioning Instructions)
20 AUX LED LED lights up when additional function is active.
21 SYNC LED LED lights up when the SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion is active.
22 Neutral LED port • LED lights up when the pointer (24) is at the level
of this marking.
• The port gear is disengaged (or will be disengag-
ed).

Table 36: Command unit ROS 17 – Controls and indicators

TIM-ID: 0000052851 - 002

126 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.2.4 Command unit ROS 16 for three shafts

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 Port propulsion control lever • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
set the engine speed for the port engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the port power
train.
2 Propulsion control lever for middle power • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
train set the engine speed for the middle engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the middle
power train.
3 Starboard propulsion control lever • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
set the engine speed for the starboard engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the starboard
power train.
4 Starboard pointer The position of the pointer indicates the starboard
gearbox state (not when the warm-up function is ac-
tive).
5 Pointer for middle power train The position of the pointer indicates the gearbox
TIM-ID: 0000039874 - 003

state of the middle power train (not when the warm-

up function is active).
6 Port pointer The position of the pointer indicates the port gear-
box state (not when the warm-up function is active).

Table 37: Command unit ROS 16 – Propulsion control lever and gearbox state indicator

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 127

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
1 CMD LED LED lights up when the CMD pushbutton is pressed.
2 CMD pushbutton • Key to select the commanding control stand.
• Pushbutton to acknowledge the horn of the com-
mand unit.
• Pushbutton to activate the warm-up function.
3 COMMAND LED port • LED flashes when command of the port power
train can be assumed.
• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-
mand of the port power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
4 SCRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SMART CRUISING mode.
5 COMMAND LED for middle power train • LED flashes when command of the middle power
train can be assumed.
• LED lights up when the propulsion control lever is
in command of the middle power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
TIM-ID: 0000039874 - 003

6 CRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate CRUISING mode.

7 CRS LED • LED flashes when the engine speed has been lim-
ited due to mode change TRL → CRS.
• LED flashes when CRUISING mode is active.
8 SCRS LED LED flashes when SMART CRUISE mode is active.
9 TRL LED LED flashes when TROLLING mode is active.
10 TRL pushbutton Pushbutton to activate TROLLING mode.

128 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
11 Alarm LED for middle power train • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the RCS of the middle
power train.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
12 Alarm LED port • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the port RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
13 SYNC pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion.
14 AUX pushbutton Pushbutton to activate an additional function. (→ In-
stallation and Commissioning Instructions)
15 AUX LED LED lights up when additional function is active.
16 SYNC LED LED lights up when the SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion is active.

Table 38: Command unit ROS 16 – Controls and indicators

TIM-ID: 0000039874 - 003

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 CMD LED LED lights up when the CMD pushbutton is pressed.
2 CMD pushbutton • Key to select the commanding control stand.
• Pushbutton to acknowledge the horn of the com-
mand unit.
• Pushbutton to activate the warm-up function.
3 COMMAND LED This LED is not assigned on the ROS 16 command
unit for three shafts.
4 SCRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SMART CRUISING mode.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 129

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
5 COMMAND LED starboard • LED flashes slowly when command of the star-
board power train can be assumed.
• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-
mand of the starboard power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
6 CRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate CRUISING mode.
7 CRS LED • LED flashes when the engine speed has been lim-
ited due to mode change TRL → CRS.
• LED flashes when CRUISING mode is active.
8 Ahead mark The gearbox is engaged ahead when the pointer
(→ Figure 84) (4, 5, 6) is level with or past this mark
(not when the warm-up function is active).
9 Neutral LED starboard LED lights up when the pointer (→ Figure 84) (4, 5, 6)
is level with this mark.
The gearbox is disengaged (or will be disengaged).
10 Astern mark The gearbox is engaged ahead when the pointer
(→ Figure 84) (4, 5, 6) is level with or past this mark
(not when the warm-up function is active).
11 SCRS LED LED flashes when SMART CRUISE mode is active.
12 TRL LED LED flashes when TROLLING mode is active.
13 TRL pushbutton Pushbutton to activate TROLLING mode.
14 Alarm LED starboard • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the starboard RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
15 Alarm LED This LED is not assigned on the ROS 16 command
unit for three shafts.
16 SYNC pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion.
17 AUX pushbutton Pushbutton to activate an additional function. (→ In-
stallation and Commissioning Instructions)
18 AUX LED LED lights up when additional function is active.
19 SYNC LED LED lights up when the SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion is active.

Table 39: Command unit ROS 16 – Controls and indicators

TIM-ID: 0000039874 - 003

130 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.2.5 Command unit ROS 13 for four shafts
Two ROS 13 command units are used on four-shaft plants.
Initial command must be assumed separately on each of the command units after switching on.
Alarms must be acknowledged separately on each of the command units.

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 Propulsion control lever port outer / star- • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
board inner set the engine speed for the port outer / star-
board inner engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the power
train.
2 Propulsion control lever port inner / star- • Propulsion control lever to engage/disengage and
board outer set the engine speed for the port inner / star-
board outer engine.
• Position indicates set gear state of the power
train.
3 CMD LED LED lights up when the CMD pushbutton is pressed.
4 CMD pushbutton • Key to select the commanding control stand.
TIM-ID: 0000038497 - 003

• Pushbutton to acknowledge the horn of the com-

mand unit.
• Pushbutton to activate the warm-up function.
5 COMMAND LED port • LED flashes when command of the port power
train can be assumed.
• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-
mand of the port power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
6 SCRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SMART CRUISING mode.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | 131

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
7 COMMAND LED starboard • LED flashes slowly when command of the star-
board power train can be assumed.
• LED lit when propulsion control lever is in com-
mand of the starboard power train.
• LED flashes quickly when the warm-up function is
activated.
8 CRS pushbutton Pushbutton to activate CRUISING mode.
9 CRS LED • LED flashes when the engine speed has been lim-
ited due to mode change TRL → CRS.
• LED flashes when CRUISING mode is active.
10 Ahead mark The gearbox is engaged ahead when the pointer (23,
24) is level with or past this mark (not when the
warm-up function is active).
11 Neutral LED starboard LED lights up when the pointer (23) is at the level of
this marking.
The starboard gear is disengaged (or will be disen-
gaged).
12 SCRS LED LED flashes when SMART CRUISE mode is active.
13 Astern mark The gearbox is engaged astern when the pointer (23,
24) is level with or past this mark (not when the
warm-up function is active).
14 TRL LED LED flashes when TROLLING mode is active.
15 TRL pushbutton Pushbutton to activate TROLLING mode.
16 Alarm LED starboard • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the starboard RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
17 SYNC pushbutton Pushbutton to activate SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion.
18 Alarm LED port • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the port RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged and is active.
19 AUX pushbutton Pushbutton to activate an additional function. (→ In-
stallation and Commissioning Instructions)
20 AUX LED LED lights up when additional function is active.
21 SYNC LED LED lights up when the SCL or SMART SYNC func-
tion is active.
22 Neutral LED port • LED lights up when the pointer (24) is at the level
of this marking.
• The port gear is disengaged (or will be disengag-
TIM-ID: 0000038497 - 003

ed).
23 Starboard pointer The position of the pointer indicates the starboard
gearbox state (not when the warm-up function is ac-
tive).
24 Pointer port The position of the pointer indicates the port gear-
box state (not when the warm-up function is active).

Table 40: Command unit ROS 13 – Controls and indicators

132 | Remote Control System RCS-6 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.1.2.6 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

3.1.2.6.1 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Controls and indicators

Controls

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 Thumbwheel, port To control clutch operation and engine speed of port
power train
2 Thumbwheel, starboard To control clutch operation and engine speed of star-
board power train
3 Windlass 2 pushbuttons to control the windlass
(if provided by the shipyard and wired accordingly)
4 Bow thruster 2 pushbuttons to control the bow thruster
(if provided by the shipyard and wired accordingly)
5 Stern thruster 2 pushbuttons to control the stern thruster
(if provided by the shipyard and wired accordingly)
6 TROLLING Pushbutton to activate/deactivate Trolling mode (if
TIM-ID: 0000038456 - 002

feature is supported by the gearbox)

7 COMMAND Pushbutton to assume command at the portable
control unit

Table 41: Portable control unit ROS 8 controls

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 133

 Indicators

Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function

1 Thumbwheel, starboard • Position indicates gearbox setpoint state and en-
gine setpoint speed.
• Position shown in the illustration: Full ahead
2 “Ahead” mark, starboard The gearbox is engaged ahead when the thumbwheel
(1) is set at or above this mark (lock).
3 “Neutral” mark, starboard The gearbox is disengaged when the thumbwheel (1)
is set at this mark (lock).
4 “Astern” mark, starboard The gearbox is engaged astern when the thumb-
wheel (1) is set at or below this mark (lock).
5 Alarm, starboard • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the starboard RCS.
• LED is lit when all active alarms have been ac-
knowledged.
6 TROLLING LED is lit when one of the configurable modes (Trol-
ling, SCRS, Docking) is active.
7 COMMAND, starboard • LED flashes when the portable control unit can
TIM-ID: 0000038456 - 002

assume initial command.

• LED lights up when the portable control unit is in
command of the starboard power train.
• LED flashes as long as the “Warm-up” function is
active on the starboard power train (speed varia-
tion without clutch engagement).

134 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Lettering/designation Meaning/function
8 COMMAND, port • LED flashes when the portable control unit can
assume initial command.
• LED lights up when the portable control unit is in
command of the port power train.
• LED flashes as long as the “Warm-up” function is
active on the port power train (speed variation
without clutch engagement).
9 Alarm, port • LED flashes when an unacknowledged summary
alarm is received from the port RCS.
• LED lights up when this alarm has been acknowl-
edged.
10 “Astern” mark, port The gearbox is engaged astern when the thumb-
wheel (11) is set at or below this mark (lock).
11 Thumbwheel, port • Position indicates gearbox setpoint state and en-
gine setpoint speed.
• Position shown in the illustration: Neutral
12 “Neutral” mark, port The gearbox is disengaged when the thumbwheel
(11) is set at this mark (lock).
13 “Ahead” mark, port The gearbox is engaged ahead when the thumbwheel
(11) is set at or above this mark (lock).

Table 42: Portable control unit ROS 8 indicators

TIM-ID: 0000038456 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 135

 3.1.2.6.2 Emergency Panel – Indicators and controls
Emergency Panel controls

Item Function Description

1 Gearbox state command push- F AHEAD
2 buttons N NEUTRAL
3 R ASTERN
4 Speed demand pushbuttons + UP
5 - DOWN
6 Emergency Panel activation ON/OFF Switches Emergency Panel on and off
7 Slide To prevent unintentional actuation of the “ON/OFF
pushbutton (6)

Table 43: Emergency Panel controls

TIM-ID: 0000068088 - 001

136 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 LED status indicators

Item Lettering LED color LED state Explanation

1 Gearbox state com- White Lit Lamp test
mand AHEAD (F) Blue Lit Gearbox state command AHEAD is ac-
tive
Red Lit • Alarm, fault in gearbox control
• Signal on checking gearbox configu-
ration
– Off -
2 Gearbox state com- White Lit Lamp test
mand NEUTRAL (N) Blue Lit Gearbox state command NEUTRAL is
active
- Off -
3 Gearbox state com- White Lit Lamp test
mand ASTERN (R) Blue Lit Gearbox state command ASTERN is ac-
tive
TIM-ID: 0000068088 - 001

Red Lit • Alarm, fault in gearbox control

• Signal on checking gearbox configu-
ration
– Off
4 Speed demand RPM White Lit • Lamp test
“+” • Speed increase procedure/ pushbut-
ton actuation
– Off -

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 137

 Item Lettering LED color LED state Explanation
5 Speed demand RPM White Lit • Lamp test
“-” • Speed decrease procedure/ push-
button actuation
– Off -
6 ON/OFF White Lit Lamp test
Green Lit Emergency Panel active
– Off Emergency Panel inactive
7 Diagnostic lamp Blue Lit Power supply applied, normal operation
Rapid flashing Emergency Panel status monitoring sig-
(8 Hz) naling a problem (internal fault)
Off • Power supply not applied.
• Power supply to generate flashing
frequency not applied.
• Diagnostic lamp faulty
8 EMERGENCY PANEL Yellow Lit Power supply provided
indicator
9 LOCAL indicator Yellow Lit • Alarm
• LOCAL active (Local control active at
the relevant LOP)
10 INTERLOCK indicator Yellow Lit • Alarm
• INTERLOCK active (engagement/
disengagement prohibited)

Table 44: Emergency Panel – LED status indicators

LED status indicators

The light emitting diodes indicate the operating states of the propulsion plant and any alarms.
The diagnostic lamp indicates the operating states of the Emergency Panel.
Indicator brightness is preset and cannot be adjusted.

TIM-ID: 0000068088 - 001

138 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2 Operation at the Control Stand
3.2.1 Switching the Overall System On and Off

3.2.1.1 Switching on the overall system, without key switch

Preconditions
☑ On-board power supply is switched on.
☑ Overall system is switched on with master switch (circuit breaker).

NOTICE
Risk of damage to engine/system.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Before switching on, ensure that the engine/system is ready for operation.
• Before switching on, ensure that all housings are closed.
• Before switching on, ensure that no work is in progress anywhere on the entire system.

Note: Remote/Local operating status is stored. The plant automatically changes to the stored operating state
when started.

Switching on overall system with master switch (circuit breaker)

1. Switch on master switch (circuit breaker) for the power train.
Result: • Local Operating Panel LOP of the power train is booted.
• Background illumination of Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 of the power train lights up.
• Utility lamp of the Start/Stop PAN lights up for the power train concerned.
• COMMAND (CMD) LED lights up on the command units on the control stands of the power train (Remote
mode). The LED lights up if the plant was in Local mode the last time it was switched off.
• LED CONTROL ACTIVE / LAMP TEST of the Start/Stop PAN on the control stands lights up for the power
train.
• LEDs on the keys of all command units of the power train glow.
• Automatic lamp test is executed.
• The buzzers of the Remote Control System RCS-6 sound on all control stands capable of assuming initial
command of the power train.
• The CMD LEDs flash on all control stands capable of assuming initial command of the power train.
2. Repeat procedure for other power trains (if applicable).
Result: Procedures are repeated in the same way as for the first power train.
3. If the plant was previously not switched off in Local mode on plants equipped with LOP 14:
Result: • COMMAND LED flashes on the control stands capable of assuming initial command.
• Command unit buzzers sound (providing that RCS Quiet Mode is deactivated).
4. On plants equipped with LOP 13:
Result: • COMMAND LED flashes on the control stands capable of assuming initial command.
• Command unit buzzers sound (providing that RCS Quiet Mode is deactivated).
TIM-ID: 0000038488 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at the Control Stand | 139

 3.2.1.2 Switching on the overall system, with key switch (optional)
Preconditions
☑ Overall system is switched on with master switch (circuit breaker).

NOTICE
Risk of damage to engine/system.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Before switching on, ensure that the engine/system is ready for operation.
• Before switching on, ensure that all housings are closed.
• Before switching on, ensure that no work is in progress anywhere on the entire system.

Note: • Due to the network architecture of the Local Operating Panels on multiple-engine systems, the functional
software of all Local Operating Panels is booted when one of the power trains is switched on using the key
switch. They are then in Standby mode. Only those MCS and RCS components are switched on which are
associated with the power train which has been switched on with the key switch.
• Remote/Local operating status is stored. The plant automatically changes to the stored operating state
when started.

Switching on overall system with Main/RCS key switch

1. Insert the Main/RCS key in the key switch on the main control stand.
2. Turn the Main/RCS key clockwise in the key switch.
Result: • Local Operating Panel LOP of the power train is booted.
All Local Operating Panels are automatically booted in Standby mode on multiple-engine systems (if appli-
cable).
• Background illumination of Monitoring and Control System MCS-6 of the power train lights up.
• Utility lamp of the Start/Stop PAN lights up for the power train concerned.
• LED CONTROL ACTIVE / LAMP TEST of the Start/Stop PAN on the control stands lights up for the power
train.
• LEDs on the keys of all command units of the power train glow.
• The buzzers of the Remote Control System RCS-6 sound on all control stands capable of assuming initial
command of the power train.
• The CMD LEDs flash on all control stands capable of assuming initial command of the power train (Re-
mote mode). The LED lights up if the plant was in Local mode the last time it was switched off.
3. Repeat procedure for other power trains (if applicable).
Result: Procedures are repeated in the same way as for the first power train.
TIM-ID: 0000040031 - 003

140 | Switching the Overall System On and Off | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.1.3 Switching off the overall system, without key switch
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ The engine comes to a standstill.

Switching off overall system with master switch (circuit breaker)

1. Switch off master switch (circuit breaker) for the power train.
Result: • Overall power train system is out of operation.
2. Repeat procedure for other power trains (if applicable).
Result: Procedures are repeated in the same way as for the first power train.
TIM-ID: 0000038494 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Switching the Overall System On and Off | 141

 3.2.1.4 Switching off the overall system, with key switch (optional)
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ The engine comes to a standstill.

Note: The MCS and RCS components connected to the power train are switched off. All Local Operating Panels
which are supplied with power remain in Standby mode until the last power train is switched off due to the
Local Operating Panel network architecture on multiple-engine plants.

Switching off overall system with Main/RCS key switch (optional)

1. Turn the Main/RCS key counter-clockwise in the key switch.
Result: • Overall power train system is out of operation.
2. Repeat procedure for other power trains (if applicable).
Result: Procedures are repeated in the same way as for the first power train.

TIM-ID: 0000040032 - 003

142 | Switching the Overall System On and Off | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.2 Operation at the Start/Stop PAN

3.2.2.1 Engine startup

Preconditions
☑ Engine prepared for startup (→ Engine operating instructions).
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Propulsion control lever on the command unit of the commanding control stand is set to NEUTRAL.
☑ Gearbox is in neutral position.
☑ No engagement request applied.
☑ No start interlocks applied.
☑ CONTROL ACTIVE / LAMP TEST LED on Start/Stop PAN control panel on the control stand lit green.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.

Starting engine at control panel Start/Stop PAN on control stand

Note: • The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton.
• Starting is not executed on actuating the START pushbutton when the CONTROL ACTIVE / LAMP TEST
pushbutton is lit yellow. A message appears on the propulsion control lever display indicating why starting
cannot be executed.
1. Press START pushbutton.
Result: • LED START flashes.
• Automatic starting sequence is executed.
• LED START lights up.
• When optional oil priming pump is installed: Engine is primed.
• Engine speed increases.
• Engine runs at idling speed on completion of the starting sequence.
TIM-ID: 0000038489 - 003

• The power train is ready for engagement.

2. Repeat procedure for each additional engine (if applicable).
Result: • Starting sequence is repeated in the same way as for the first engine.

Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u (→ Page 216)

Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

u (→ Page 223)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at the Start/Stop PAN | 143

 3.2.2.2 Activating override function
NOTICE
Inadmissible operating status.
Severe damage to property!
• Use override function only in hazardous situations to ensure full capability in the event of engine
faults.

Note: When the override function is active, the overall system ignores many operating statuses which would nor-
mally lead to automatic power reduction or engine shutdown:
• If the engine is at a standstill:
Start interlocks are ignored, e.g. the engine can be started even with the gearbox engaged.
• If the engine is running:
Power reduction or engine shutdown does not result if engine operating limits are exceeded.
Exception: the engine is still shut down if the overrevving limit is exceeded.

Activating override on Start/Stop PAN control panel on control stand

Note: MTU accepts no responsibility whatsoever for any engine damage that may occur while the override function
is active. Activation of the override function is recorded by the Engine Control Unit.
1. Slide the locking device up until it engages.
2. Press the OVERRIDE pushbutton.
Result: • The OVERRIDE LED lights up.
• Alarm horn sounds.
• COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF LED flashes.
• Alarm indication appears on display.
3. Slide the locking device down until it engages.
4. Press the COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF button.
Result: • The alarm horn is silenced.
• COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF LED flashes.
• Engine is then run in Override mode.
• Any faults or alerts must be rectified manually.
5. Acknowledge alarms on the display.
Result: COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF LED lights up.

TIM-ID: 0000038490 - 005

144 | Operation at the Start/Stop PAN | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.2.3 Override function – Deactivation
Preconditions
☑ Operating mode Override is activated.
☑ LED OVERRIDE on control panel Start/Stop PAN on the control stand is lit.

Deactivating override at control panel Start/Stop PAN on control stand

1. Slide the locking device up until it engages.
2. Press the OVERRIDE pushbutton.
Result: • The LED OVERRIDE goes out.
• Operating mode Override is deactivated.
• LED COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF goes out.
3. Slide the locking device down until it engages.
TIM-ID: 0000038491 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at the Start/Stop PAN | 145

 3.2.2.4 Engine – Shutdown
Preconditions
☑ Propulsion control lever of the power train on the commanding control stand is set to NEUTRAL.
☑ LED CONTROL ACTIVE / LAMP TEST on control panel Start/Stop PAN on the control stand is lit.
☑ Engine running at idling speed.

Shutting down engine at control panel Start/Stop PAN on control stand

1. Press STOP pushbutton.
Result: • Stop LED flashes.
• The automatic stopping sequence is carried out.
• Engine speed decreases.
• Current measured values are indicated on the display instruments at all control stands.
• LED STOP lights up when the engine speed has fallen below 300 rpm.
• The engine is at a standstill when the automatic stopping sequence has been completed and the STOP
LED goes out.
• The gearbox is disengaged.
2. Repeat procedure for other engines (if applicable).
Result: The stopping sequence is repeated in the same way as for the first engine.
3. Perform engine-related tasks which are required after an engine stop (→ Engine Operating Instructions).

TIM-ID: 0000038492 - 003

146 | Operation at the Start/Stop PAN | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.2.5 Engine – Emergency shutdown
Preconditions
☑ Engine running.

NOTICE
An emergency stop subjects the engine system to an extremely high load.
Risk of overheating, damage to components!
• Trigger an emergency stop only in emergency situations.

Emergency engine shutdown on Start/Stop PAN control panel on control

stand
1. Slide the locking device up until it engages.
2. Press EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton.
Result: • LED EMERGENCY STOP lights up.
• Alarm horn sounds.
• LED COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF flashes.
• On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Flaps close.
• Engine is shut down by interrupting fuel injection.
• Alarm indication appears on display.
3. Slide the locking device down until it engages.
4. Press COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF pushbutton.
Result: • The alarm horn is silenced.
• LED COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF flashes.
5. Acknowledge alarms on the display.
Result: LED COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF goes out.
6. On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Open flaps manually.
Result: Engine is ready for starting.
TIM-ID: 0000038493 - 006

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at the Start/Stop PAN | 147

 3.2.3 Operating with command units (all variants)

3.2.3.1 Assuming initial command

Preconditions
☑ The on-board power supply is switched on.
☑ Overall system is switched on.
☑ The COMMAND LED on the command unit flashes.

Note: Apart from alarms, no other audible signals are output when RCS-Quiet mode is activated.

Allocating initial command

1. Set the propulsion control lever to the NEUTRAL position on the command unit of the control stand which is
to receive command.
2. Press the CMD pushbutton on the command unit.
Result: • The buzzers of the Remote Control System RCS are silenced on all control stands.
• The COMMAND LED lights up on the commanding control stand.
• The selected control stand is in command.
• The gearbox is disengaged.

TIM-ID: 0000039000 - 001

148 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.3.2 Command transfer
Preconditions
☑ Fully integrated system is switched on.
☑ The propulsion control levers on the command unit of the control stand which is to assume command are
in the NEUTRAL setting.

Note: • On plants with just one shaft, please note that the controls and indicators of the fully integrated system
are only provided for one power train.
• Apart from alarms, no other audible signals are output when RCS-Quiet mode is activated.
• The various modes (CRS, SCRS, TRL, AUX, SYNC) are maintained during command transfer.

Assuming command at another control stand

1. Press CMD pushbutton on the command unit of the control stand which is to assume command.
Result: COMMAND LEDs flash.
2. Set the propulsion control levers on the command unit in one of the following ways:
a) Move the propulsion control levers to any position within two seconds.
Result: • The COMMAND LEDs on the command unit of the previously commanding control stand go out.
• The buzzer on the previously commanding control stand sounds for two seconds.
• The COMMAND LEDs on the newly selected control stand light up.
• The newly selected control stand is in command.
• The engine speed and vessel speed are adapted to the settings of the commanding control stand.
b) Leave the propulsion control levers in the NEUTRAL position.
Result: • The COMMAND LEDs on the previously commanding control stand go out.
• The buzzer on the previously commanding control stand sounds for two seconds.
• The COMMAND LEDs on the newly selected control stand light up.
• The newly selected control stand is in command.
• The engines are running at idling speed.
• The gearboxes are disengaged.
TIM-ID: 0000039001 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 149

 3.2.3.3 Maneuvering
Preconditions
☑ Engine is running at idling speed.

Selecting a mode
u Press pushbutton for desired mode on command unit. The following propulsion modes are possible:
• Cruising mode (CRS) (→ Page 154)
• Smart Cruise mode (SCRS) (→ Page 156)
• Trolling mode (TRL) (→ Page 160)
• Synchronization mode (SCL or Smart Sync) (→ Page 162)
• Auxiliary functions (AUX) (→ Page 153)
– Docking mode (→ Page 168)
– Warm-up mode (→ Page 167)
– Smart Speed Adjust mode (→ Page 169)
– High Idle mode (→ Page 170)
Result: • Selected mode is activated.
• LED of selected mode lights up on command unit.

Engaging and changing engine speed

1. Move the propulsion control lever on the command unit of the commanding control stand slowly to the en-
gagement lock (ahead or astern).
Result: The clutch is engaged and thrust is exerted in the desired direction.
2. Move the propulsion control lever further.
Result: Engine speed and vessel's speed increase.
3. Leave the propulsion control lever in position when the desired speed has been reached.
Result: The vessel runs in the set direction with the set thrust and at constant engine speed.

Reducing thrust and disengaging

1. Move the propulsion control lever on the command unit of the commanding control stand towards the NEU-
TRAL position.
Result: Thrust decreases.
2. Lock the propulsion control lever in the NEUTRAL position.
Result: • Thrust ceases.
• Disengagement takes place on reaching disengagement speed.
TIM-ID: 0000039004 - 003

150 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.3.4 Crash Stop maneuver
Preconditions
☑ Engine running and engaged in Ahead.
☑ Only in case of emergency (increased wear).

NOTICE
The propulsion plant is subjected to extremely high loads in the event of a Crash Stop maneuver.
The entire propulsion plant or parts thereof may suffer damage!
• Crash-StopExecute a Crash Stop maneuver in cases of real emergency only.

Move propulsion control lever to Full Astern

u Move propulsion control unit at command unit of commanding control stand directly to Full Astern position
in one continuous movement without pausing in Neutral position.
Result: This reduces the vessel speed at an optimal rate.
TIM-ID: 0000057365 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 151

 3.2.3.5 RCS propulsion modes
Cruising mode (CRS)
Cruising mode is the normal mode of travel. i.e. vessel moves fully engaged at a speed ranging from idle to
rated speed (clutch is fully engaged).

Smart Cruise mode (SCRS)

Prerequisites: The gearbox features the Trolling option.
In Smart Cruise mode, motion is realized by a combination of “Trolling” and full engagement. The vessel is
controlled in the control lever setting range near neutral (range adjustable with configuration tool) by varying
engine speed and varying slip. In the control lever setting range beyond the preset range (full ahead or full
astern), the vessel is controlled by varying engine speed. The clutch is engaged.

Trolling mode (TRL)

Prerequisites: The gearbox features the Trolling option.
In case of vessels that already reach high speeds at idling, Trolling mode provides finer maneuverability. This
is realized by only partially engaging gearbox and propeller allowing a certain degree of clutch slip. This
means that the shaft turns more slowly. The gearbox is operated over the entire control lever range in Trol-
ling mode.SMART SYNC

Synchronization mode SYNC

There are two synchronization modes SCL and SMART SYNC. One of these operating modes is allocated to
the permanently assigned pushbutton ( SYNC) in the course of basic system configuration.

SCL (Single Control Lever)

Engine speed and clutch control is synchronized when the SCL function is activated. The entire propulsion
plant is then controlled by one propulsion control lever. The SCL function can be selected in all propulsion
modes except for “Warm-up”. Control is effected via the Master propulsion control lever only when the SCL
function is active.

SMART SYNC
The SMART SYNC function allows automatic engine speed adjustment on the Master engine. If both propul-
sion control levers are operated in parallel and remain in a “catchment window” for a certain time, the speed
of the Slave engine is adjusted to that of the Master engine. In contrast to the conventional SCL function,
SMART SYNC can even remain switched on during complex maneuvers.
TIM-ID: 0000039005 - 002

152 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.3.6 RCS modes – Additional functions (AUX)
One of the additional functions can be assigned to the AUX pushbutton in the course of basic configuration.

Warm-up mode
In Warm-up mode, the speed can be varied over the entire adjustment range. However, the clutch always
remains disengaged. The SCL or SMART SYNC function is not available in Warm-up mode.
Warm-up mode is switched on when the propulsion control lever is moved from the neutral setting with the
CMD pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand pressed. Switch-off only occurs
when the propulsion control lever is put into the neutral setting and the CMD pushbutton is pressed again in
this neutral setting.
This feature can be configured on the AUX pushbutton when performing basic configuration of the system.

Docking mode (option)

Docking mode is a Smart Cruising mode optimized for docking maneuvers. The vessel is operated in Trolling
mode, but the thrust never falls below a minimum value (Trolling starts with less slip than with SCRS).

Smart Speed Adjust

Speed is adjusted by actuating pushbuttons on the propulsion control lever.

High Idle
Increased idle speed, i.e. the engine speed does not fall below a certain value leaving a certain amount of
thrust e.g. for maneuvering.
TIM-ID: 0000039006 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 153

 3.2.3.7 Cruising mode (CRS)
Preconditions
☑ Engine is running at idling speed.
☑ Note configuration for mode change (Automation Suite).

Switching on Cruising mode

1. Switch on the fully integrated system.
Result: • Cruising mode is active (CRS is the standard mode).
• LED CRS on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.

Changing Cruising mode

From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
TRL CRS Control lever < Press CRS • LED TRL deactivat- Depending on the mo-
50%* ahead/astern pushbutton. ed mentary operational
setting or neutral • LED CRS activated state, the thrust of the
* Position can be • The Trolling function propulsion system can
set is deactivated. change considerably. If a
The engine speed is thrust change is to be
set according to the avoided, the mode
performance curve in switch-over must be
CRS mode. This is nor- made from neutral.
mally higher than No thrust changes are
when in TRL mode. expected during a mode
→ CRS mode is switch- switch-over in the en-
ed on. gagement locks.
Control lever > Press CRS • LED TRL deactivat- The flashing LED CRS in-
50%* ahead/astern pushbutton. ed dicates that the speed
setting • LED CRS flashes has been limited.
* Position can be • The Trolling function If the propulsion control
set is deactivated. lever is in the full ahead
The engine speed is range during a mode
set according to the switch-over then there
performance curve in will be a large change in
CRS mode at 50 %* thrust.
control lever setting. To limit the change in
This will be higher than thrust in this case, the
when in TRL mode. speed is limited to 50%
→CRS mode is switch- after the switch-over.
ed on, but limited in
speed.
TIM-ID: 0000039007 - 003

CRS switched on Possibility 1: • LED CRS activated

but limited in speed Press CRS Speed set according to
(LED CRS flashes) pushbutton the CRS performance
again. curve and setting of
the control lever .
→ CRS mode is switch-
ed on.

154 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
Possibility 2: • LED CRS activated
Put propulsion Speed set according to
control lever in- the CRS performance
to a setting curve and setting of
<50%. the control lever .
→ CRS mode is switch-
ed on.
SCRS CRS Setting of the pro- Press CRS • LED SCRS deacti- Depending on the mo-
pulsion control lev- pushbutton. vated mentary operational
er within the SCRS • LED CRS activated state, the thrust of the
Trolling range The engine speed is propulsion system can
set according to the change considerably. If a
performance curve in thrust change is to be
CRS mode. This is nor- avoided, the mode
mally higher than switch-over must be
when in SCRS mode. made from neutral.
→ CRS mode is switch- No thrust changes are
ed on. expected during a mode
switch-over in the en-
gagement locks.
Propulsion control Press CRS • LED SCRS deacti-
lever setting out- pushbutton. vated
side of the SCRS • LED CRS activated
Trolling range The engine speed is
set according to the
performance curve in
CRS mode. This is nor-
mally higher than
when in SCRS mode.
→ CRS mode is switch-
ed on.
Dock- CRS Similar to SCRS->
ing CRS

Table 45: Possible changes in Cruising mode

1. Press pushbutton for the desired mode on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • The selected mode is activated.
• LED on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.
TIM-ID: 0000039007 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 155

 3.2.3.8 Smart Cruise mode (SCRS)
Preconditions
☑ Engine is running at idling speed.
☑ Cruising mode (CRS) is activated.
☑ Note configuration for mode change; Automation Suite.
☑ The Trolling option is available at the gearbox.

Activating Trolling mode

1. Press SCRS pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • SCRS mode is activated.
• LED SCRS on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.

Changing Docking mode

From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
CRS SCRS The propulsion con- Press SCRS push- • LED CRS deacti- Depending on the
trol lever is outside button. vated momentary opera-
the Trolling range of • LED SCRS activat- tional state, the
the SCRS mode. ed thrust of the pro-
The engine speed is pulsion system can
set according to the change considera-
performance curve bly. If a thrust
in SCRS mode. This change is to be
is normally lower avoided, the mode
than when in CRS switch-over must
mode. be made from neu-
⇒ SCRS mode is tral.
switched on.
The propulsion con- Press SCRS push- • LED CRS deacti-
trol lever is inside button. vated
the Trolling range of • LED SCRS activat-
the SCRS mode. En- ed
gine speed is > maxi- The engine speed is
mum speed in Trol- set according to the
ling mode. performance curve
in SCRS mode. This
will be lower than
when in CRS mode.
Trolling is only acti-
vated when the
speed has fallen be-
TIM-ID: 0000017128 - 004

low a value < the

max. Trolling speed.
⇒ SCRS mode is
switched on.

156 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
The propulsion con- Press SCRS push- • LED CRS deacti-
trol lever is inside button. vated
the Trolling range of Control lever < • LED SCRS activat-
the SCRS mode. En- 50%* ahead/ ed
gine speed is < maxi- astern setting or SCRS mode switch-
mum speed in Trol- neutral. ed on. The engine
ling mode. speed is set accord-
ing to the perform-
ance curve in SCRS
mode.
Trolling activated.
⇒ SCRS mode is
switched on.
TRL SCRS Control lever < 50%* Press SCRS push- • LED TRL deacti- Depending on the
ahead/astern setting button. vated momentary opera-
or neutral. • LED SCRS activat- tional state, the
The propulsion con- ed thrust of the pro-
trol lever is inside The engine speed is pulsion system can
the Trolling range of set according to the change considera-
the SCRS mode. performance curve bly. If a thrust
* Position can be set in SCRS mode. This change is to be
is normally lower avoided, the mode
than when in TRL switch-over must
mode. be made from neu-
Trolling activated. tral.
⇒ SCRS mode is No thrust changes
switched on. are expected dur-
ing a mode switch-
over in the engage-
ment locks.
Control lever < 50%* Press SCRS push- • LED TRL deacti- Depending on the
ahead/astern setting button. vated momentary opera-
or neutral. • LED SCRS activat- tional state, the
The propulsion con- ed thrust of the pro-
trol lever is inside • The Trolling func- pulsion system can
the Trolling range of tion is deactivat- change considera-
the SCRS mode. ed. bly. If a thrust
* Position can be set The engine speed is change is to be
set according to the avoided, the mode
performance curve switch-over must
in SCRS mode. This be made from neu-
is normally lower tral.
than when in TRL No thrust changes
mode. are expected dur-
⇒ SCRS mode is ing a mode switch-
TIM-ID: 0000017128 - 004

switched on. over in the engage-

ment locks.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 157

 From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
Control lever > 50%* Press SCRS push- • LED TRL deacti- The flashing LED
ahead/astern setting button. vated SCRS indicates
or neutral. • LED SCRS flashes that the speed has
The propulsion con- The engine speed is been limited.
trol lever is inside set according to the If the propulsion
the Trolling range of performance curve control lever is in
the SCRS mode. in SCRS mode at the full ahead
* Position can be set 50 %* control lever range during a
setting. This will be mode switch-over
higher than when in then there will be a
TRL mode. large change in
Trolling remains acti- thrust.
vated. To limit the change
⇒ SCRS mode is in thrust in this
switched on. case, the speed is
limited to 50% af-
ter the switch-over.
Control lever > 50%* Press SCRS push- • LED TRL deacti- The flashing LED
ahead/astern setting button. vated SCRS indicates
or neutral. • LED SCRS activat- that the speed has
The propulsion con- ed been limited.
trol lever is inside • The Trolling func- If the propulsion
the Trolling range of tion is deactivat- control lever is in
the SCRS mode. ed. the full ahead
* Position can be set The engine speed is range during a
set according to the mode switch-over
performance curve then there will be a
in SCRS mode at large change in
50 %* control lever thrust.
setting. This will be To limit the change
higher than when in in thrust in this
TRL mode. case, the speed is
⇒ SCRS mode is limited to 50% af-
switched on but lim- ter the switch-over.
ited in speed.
SCRS switched on Press SCRS push- • LED SCRS activat-
but limited in speed. button. ed
(LED SCRS flashes) Speed sets accord-
ing to the SCRS per-
formance curve and
setting of the control
lever.
⇒ SCRS mode is
switched on.
TIM-ID: 0000017128 - 004

158 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
Press SCRS push- • LED SCRS activat-
button. ed
Speed sets accord-
ing to the SCRS per-
formance curve and
setting of the control
lever.
⇒ SCRS mode is
switched on.
Docking SCRS Press SCRS push- Response depends
button. on the docking and
SCRS function set-
tings.

Table 46: Possible changes in Trolling mode

1. Press the pushbutton for the desired mode on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • The selected mode is activated.
• LED on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.
TIM-ID: 0000017128 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 159

 3.2.3.9 Trolling mode (TRL)
Preconditions
☑ The Trolling option is available at the gearbox.
☑ Note configuration for mode change; Automation Suite.
☑ The Trolling option is available at the gearbox.

Activating Trolling mode

1. Press TRL pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • Trolling mode is activated.
• LED TRL on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.

Changing Trolling mode

From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
CRS TRL Engine speed < Press TRL • LED CRS deactivated Depending on the momen-
maximum speed pushbutton. • LED TRL activated tary operational state, the
in Trolling • The Trolling function thrust of the propulsion sys-
mode. is activated. tem can change considera-
The engine speed is set bly. If a thrust change is to
according to the per- be avoided, the mode
formance curve in TRL switch-over must be made
mode. This is normally from neutral.
lower than when in CRS
mode.
⇒ TRL mode is switch-
ed on.
Engine speed > Press TRL • LED CRS deactivated
maximum speed pushbutton. • LED TRL activated
in Trolling The engine speed is set
mode. according to the per-
formance curve in TRL
mode. This will be lower
than when in CRS
mode.
When the speed has fall-
en below a value < max.
Trolling speed then Trol-
ling is activated.
⇒ TRL mode is switch-
ed on.
TIM-ID: 0000040033 - 003

160 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 From To Prerequisites Action Response Note
SCRS TRL Setting of the Press TRL • LED SCRS deactivat- Depending on the momen-
propulsion con- pushbutton. ed tary operational state, the
trol lever within • LED TRL activated thrust of the propulsion sys-
the SCRS Trol- • The Trolling function tem can change considera-
ling range. remains activated. bly. If a thrust change is to
The engine speed is set be avoided, the mode
according to the per- switch-over must be made
formance curve in TRL from neutral.
mode.
⇒ TRL mode is switch-
ed on.
Setting of the Press TRL • LED SCRS deactivat-
propulsion con- pushbutton. ed
trol lever out- • LED TRL activated
side of the The engine speed is set
SCRS Trolling according to the per-
range. formance curve in TRL
mode. This is normally
lower than when in
SCRS mode.
When the speed has fall-
en below a value < max.
Trolling speed then Trol-
ling is activated.
⇒ TRL mode is switch-
ed on.
Dock- TRL Similar to SCRS
ing

Table 47: Possible changes in Trolling mode

1. Press pushbutton for the desired mode on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • The selected mode is activated.
• LED on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.
TIM-ID: 0000040033 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 161

 3.2.3.10 Synchronization mode (SCL and SMART SYNC)
• In Synchronization mode, the engine speed and the clutch control of both propulsion plants are synchron-
ized to each other.
• The following synchronization modes are possible:
1. SCL Synchronization mode (Single Control Lever mode)
2. SMART SYNC Synchronization mode (automatic engine speed adjustment)
• The basic configuration of the system specifies which of the two synchronization operating modes is acti-
vated when pressing the SYNC pushbutton.
• Synchronization mode can be activated in all modes except in Warm-up mode.

TIM-ID: 0000039009 - 002

162 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.3.11 SCL synchronization (Single Control Lever) mode – Activation
Preconditions
☑ All power trains are engaged in the same direction.
☑ Synchronization mode SCL configured in the basic system configuration.

Activating Single Control Lever mode (SCL)

1. Press SYNC pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • The LED SYNC flashes.
2. Within four seconds, move the port control lever to the NEUTRAL position.
3. Leave the starboard control lever out of the NEUTRAL position.
Result: • The speeds of all the engines are adjusted to match the setting of the starboard control lever (SCL mas-
ter).
• The SYNC LED is activated on all command units on all control stands..
• The COMMAND LED for the starboard control lever (SCL master) remains active.
• The COMMAND LED associated with the port propulsion control lever goes out.
• SCL mode is active.
• The speed and the gearbox state of all engines are identical.
TIM-ID: 0000039010 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 163

 3.2.3.12 SCL synchronization mode (Single Control Lever mode) – Deactivation
Preconditions
☑ SCL synchronization mode (Single Control Lever mode) is activated.
☑ One of the following deactivation options is defined by basic system configuration.

Deactivation by pushbutton actuation (“pushbutton actuation and propulsion

control lever matching” setting)
1. Set the Slave propulsion control lever to the same position as the Master propulsion control lever.
2. Press SYNC pushbutton on the SCL-Master propulsion control lever on the commanding control stand.
Result: • Buzzer sounds.
• Synchronization mode is canceled.
3. Control gearbox and engine speed for all engines individually.

Deactivating by moving the Slave propulsion control lever from neutral (“Pan-
ic” setting)
Note: In this configuration the Master propulsion control lever can be moved through the Neutral setting without
deactivating Synchronization mode.
1. Shift Slave propulsion control lever out of neutral setting.
Result: Synchronization mode is canceled.
2. Control gearbox and engine speed for all engines individually.

Deactivating by moving the Master propulsion control lever into Neutral

(“Panic” setting)
1. • Either set the Master propulsion control lever to the ”neutral” setting
• Or move the Slave propulsion control lever out of the “neutral” setting.
Result: Synchronization mode is canceled.
2. Control gearbox and engine speed for all engines individually.

TIM-ID: 0000039011 - 003

164 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.3.13 Synchronization mode (SMART SYNC) – Activation
Preconditions
☑ All power trains are engaged in the same direction.
☑ Synchronization mode SMART SYNC is configured in the basic system configuration.

Activating Synchronization mode (SMART SYNC) with matching control lever

settings
1. Press SYNC pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • The COMMAND LED for the Master propulsion control lever (starboard) remains activated.
• The COMMAND LED for the Slave propulsion control lever is deactivated.
• The engine speed of all engines is adjusted to the setting of the Master propulsion control lever.
• The SYNC LED is activated on all command units on all control stands..
• The engines all run at the same speed.
2. Parallel control of the gearbox and engine speed for all engines with the propulsion control levers.
3. Move the Master or Slave propulsion control levers independently of each other (exits synchronization win-
dow).
Result: • Synchronization is canceled, gearbox and engine speed are controlled independently again.
• The COMMAND LED for the Slave propulsion control lever is activated.
• The SYNC LED remains activated on all command units on all control stands..

Activating Synchronization mode (SMART SYNC) with different control lever

settings
1. Press SYNC pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: The SYNC LED is activated on all command units on all control stands..
2. Move the propulsion control lever into a similar position (within the catchment window).
Result: • Engine speed is synchronized.
• The COMMAND LED for the Master propulsion control lever (starboard) remains activated.
• The COMMAND LED for the Slave propulsion control lever is deactivated.
• The engine speed of all engines is adjusted to the setting of the Master propulsion control lever.
• The engines all run at the same speed.
3. Move the Master or Slave propulsion control levers independently of each other (exits synchronization win-
dow).
Result: • Synchronization is canceled, gearbox and engine speed are controlled independently again.
• The COMMAND LED for the Slave propulsion control lever is activated.
• The SYNC LED remains activated on all command units on all control stands..
TIM-ID: 0000039012 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 165

 3.2.3.14 Synchronization mode (SMART SYNC) – Deactivation
Preconditions
☑ SMART SYNC Synchronization mode is activated.

Deactivating synchronization mode (SMART SYNC)

1. Press SYNC button on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • The SYNC LED is deactivated on all command units on all control stands.
• Synchronization mode (Smart SYNC) is deactivated.
2. Control gearbox and engine speed for all engines individually.

TIM-ID: 0000017140 - 001

166 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.3.15 Warm-up mode – Engine speed adjustment without engagement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is running at idling speed
☑ Single Control Lever mode (SCL) is not activated

NOTICE
Risk of uncontrolled vessel movement.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure proper operation of CMD key.

NOTICE
Sudden control-lever movement.
Possibility of emergency engine shutdown due to overspeed!
• Actuate control lever with caution.

Selecting
1. Set the propulsion control lever on the commanding control stand to “Neutral”.
2. Press and hold down “CMD” pushbutton on propulsion control lever.
Result: “Command” LED CMD flashes.
3. Move the propulsion control lever to the desired engine speed setting.
Result: The engine speed increases, the gearbox remains in the “Neutral” state.
4. “CMD” pushbutton on propulsion control lever may be released.

Deselecting
1. Set the propulsion control lever on the commanding control stand to “Neutral".
2. Press “CMD” pushbutton on propulsion control lever.
Result: “Command” LED lights up, engine runs at idling speed, gearbox is in “Neutral”.
TIM-ID: 0000017134 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 167

 3.2.3.16 Docking mode
Preconditions
☑ Docking mode is configured during basic system configuration.
☑ The Trolling option is available at the gearbox.

Switching on Docking mode

1. Press AUX pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • Docking mode is activated.
• LED AUX on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.

Changing mode (deselecting Docking mode)

1. Press pushbutton for the desired mode (CRS, SCRS, TRL) on the command unit of the commanding control
stand.
Result: • The selected mode is activated.
• LED on command unit lights up.
2. Move propulsion control lever on command unit of commanding control stand.
Result: Engagement takes place and thrust is exerted in the selected direction.

TIM-ID: 0000039008 - 002

168 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.3.17 Smart Speed Adjust (SSA)
Preconditions
☑ Smart Speed Adjust (SSA) mode is configured during basic system configuration.
☑ Cruising Mode (CRS) is active.
☑ Engine running.
☑ Synchronization is active, Master control lever set to engage ahead at idle.

Switching Smart Speed Adjust on

1. Press AUX pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • Smart Speed Adjust mode is activated.
• LED AUX on command unit lights up.
2. SCRS pushbutton increases engine speed in stages.
Result: Engine speed increases.
3. TRL pushbutton decreases engine speed in stages.
Result: Engine speed decreases.

Switching Smart Speed Adjust off

1. On the command unit of the commanding control stand:
• Press AUX pushbutton again, or
• Deactivate Synchronization mode by pressing the SYNC pushbutton, or
• Move the Master control lever out of the engaged ahead position, or
• Select CRS mode directly by pressing the CRS pushbutton
Result: • Smart Speed Adjust function is deactivated.
• CRS mode is activated. Engine speed is adjusted in accordance with the propulsion control lever setting
(idle).
• LED CRS on command unit lights up.
2. Control speed of engines with command unit of the commanding control stand.
TIM-ID: 0000070096 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating with command units (all variants) | 169

 3.2.3.18 High Idle
Preconditions
☑ High Idle mode is configured during basic system configuration.

Switching the function on

u Press AUX pushbutton on the command unit of the commanding control stand.
Result: • High Idle mode is activated.
• LED AUX on command unit lights up.
• Speed is increased by a certain value.

Switching the function off

u On the command unit of the commanding control stand:
Result: • Press AUX pushbutton again.
• High Idle function is switched off.
• LED AUX on command unit goes out.
• Speed is decreased by a certain value.

TIM-ID: 0000070026 - 001

170 | Operating with command units (all variants) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.4 Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option)

3.2.4.1 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Putting into operation

Preconditions
☑ Gearbox disengaged.
☑ Engine(s) is (are) stopped or running idle.

WARNING
Unwanted reaction of the remote control system with several portable remote control units being con-
nected to it at the same time.
Danger of injury, major material damage!
• Connect only one portable remote control unit even if several appliance outlets are provided.

WARNING
Unwanted ship movement due to loss of portable control unit.
Danger of injury, major material damage!
• Ensure that wrist strap is worn correctly (deadman's control).

Plugging in portable control unit ROS 8

TIM-ID: 0000009187 - 003

1. Unscrew the protective cap from the socket (6) at the desired point of connection.
2. Insert the connector (4) of the portable control unit (1) cable into the socket.
Result: If a higher-level Remote Control System is active:
• All LEDs on the portable control unit (1) light up briefly or are flashing.
• The horn in the portable control unit (1) sounds briefly.
• The input signals to the propulsion system remain unchanged.
3. Tighten union nut (5) by hand.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | 171
 Holding the portable control unit correctly
1. Ensure that the plug (2) of the wrist strap (3) is inserted in the corresponding holder on the portable control
unit (1).
2. Place your right hand through the wrist strap (3) and hold the control unit in this position. Make sure that the
plug (2) is not removed from the unit.
Result: If a higher-level Remote Control System is active: The portable control unit (1) is ready for operation.

TIM-ID: 0000009187 - 003

172 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | E532396/05E 2016-11
 3.2.4.2 Assuming initial command on the portable control unit
Preconditions
☑ The system is switched on.
☑ The COMMAND LEDs on the portable control unit are flashing.
☑ The nipple of the hand strap is inserted in the portable control unit.

Assuming initial command

1. Set the thumbwheels of the ROS 8 portable control unit to neutral position.
2. Press the COMMAND key on the portable control unit.
Result: • The signalization on the higher-level remote control system is silenced (details depending on the remote
control system specifics).
• The COMMAND LEDs on the portable control unit are lit.
• The portable control unit is in command.
TIM-ID: 0000009190 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | 173
 3.2.4.3 Command transfer using portable control unit ROS 8
Preconditions
☑ The higher-level RCS is switched on.
☑ The plug of the wrist strap is plugged into the fixture on the portable control unit.
☑ Taking command at the portable control unit is only possible with the clutch disengaged, i.e. in neutral
position.

Note: Procedure is formulated for two engines. Adopt a similar approach when dealing with single-engine plants.

Command transfer from a stationary control stand to the portable control

unit
1. Press COMMAND pushbutton on the portable control unit.
2. Set the thumbwheels as follows: Leave the thumbwheels in neutral position.
Result: • The COMMAND LEDs on the command unit of the previously commanding control stand go out. In case of
three and four engine plants, the LEDs go out for all power trains.
• The buzzer on the previously commanding control stand sounds for two seconds.
• The COMMAND LEDs of the portable control unit light up.
• The portable control unit is in command.
• The engines are running at idling speed.
• The gearboxes are disengaged.
• If Single Control Lever mode (SCL) was activated on the control stand then it is automatically deactivated
for all shafts.
• In case of plants with more than two power trains, the two outer shafts are controlled remotely by ROS 8.
For the other shaft(s), the engine speed is set to idling by RCS-HSG and the gearbox is disengaged.

Command transfer from the portable control unit to a stationary control

stand
1. At the target control stand, proceed as for command transfer between stationary control stands (→ Operat-
ing Instructions).
Result: • The COMMAND LEDs on the portable control unit go out.
• The buzzer in the portable control unit sounds for two seconds.
2. If required, put the portable control unit out of operation (→ Page 179).

Unintentional loss of command at the portable control unit

Note: The deadman's control is tripped if the operator is no longer holding the device firmly in his hands or if he
loses the device:
1. The plug on the wrist strap is pulled out.
Result: • The portable control unit is relieved of command by the RCS-HSG.
• The stationary control stands are prompted to assume command. Details depend on the higher-level RCS.
• The gearboxes of both power trains are set to the disengaged state.
• The speeds of both engines are set to idling.
2. Assume command at one of the stationary control stands.
TIM-ID: 0000017149 - 003

3. Determine why the deadman's control tripped and take suitable action.

174 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | E532396/05E 2016-11
 3.2.4.4 Operation
Preconditions
☑ Engine is running at idling speed (only applicable to clutch engagement procedure).
☑ The portable control unit is in command.
☑ The COMMAND LED(s) on the portable control unit is/are lit.

Engaging and changing engine speed

1. Turn thumbwheel on the portable control unit to the “Ahead” or “Astern” mark (lock).
Result: The clutch is engaged and thrust is exerted in the desired direction.
2. Slowly turn the thumbwheel further.
Result: Engine speed and vessel's speed increase.
3. When the desired speed is reached, leave the thumbwheel in the given position.
Result: The vessel runs with the set thrust and at constant engine speed.

Reducing thrust and disengaging

1. Turn the thumbwheel on the portable control unit towards the “Neutral” mark.
Result: Thrust decreases.
2. Lock the thumbwheel at the “Neutral” mark.
Result: • Thrust is no longer exerted.
• Clutch is disengaged as soon as idling speed has been reached.
TIM-ID: 0000009191 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | 175
 3.2.4.5 Adjusting engine speed from the portable control unit without engagement
Preconditions
☑ Thumbwheel is in neutral position.
☑ Single Control Lever mode (SCL) is not activated.
☑ The portable control unit is in command.
☑ The COMMAND LED(s) on the portable control unit is/are lit.

NOTICE
Inadvertent engagement results in movement.
Severe material damage!
• Ensure that the COMMAND key is held down when selecting the function.

NOTICE
Sudden thumbwheel movement.
Engine emergency shutdown due to overspeed!
• Actuate finger-grip knob with caution.

Selecting
1. Set the propulsion control lever on the commanding control stand to “Neutral”.
2. Press and hold down the “Command” key on the propulsion control lever.
Result: “Command” LED flashes.
3. Move the propulsion control lever to the desired engine speed setting.
Result: The engine speed increases, the gearbox remains in the “Neutral” state.
4. The “Command” key on the propulsion control lever can be released.

Deselecting
1. Set the propulsion control lever on the commanding control stand to “Neutral”.
2. Press the “Command” key on the propulsion control lever.
Result: The “Command” LED lights up, the engine runs at idling speed, the gearbox is in the “Neutral” state.

TIM-ID: 0000017160 - 003

176 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | E532396/05E 2016-11
 3.2.4.6 Trolling mode – Selection
Preconditions
☑ The Trolling option is available.
☑ Overall system(s) is/are switched on.
☑ Engine(s) running at idling speed.
☑ The TROLLING LED on the portable control unit is dark.
☑ The COMMAND LED(s) on the portable control unit is/are lit.
☑ The portable control unit is in command.

Note: Wording is applicable to twin-engine plants. For single-engine plants, proceed analogously.

Selecting Trolling mode with the portable control unit

1. Set both thumbwheels of the portable control unit to neutral position.
2. Press the TROLLING pushbutton.
3. Turn both thumbwheels in the desired direction.
Result: • The TROLLING LED is lit; Trolling mode is active.
• The gearboxes are engaged.
• The engine speeds increase.
• The engine speeds can only be adjusted within a limited speed range.
TIM-ID: 0000040036 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | 177
 3.2.4.7 Trolling mode – Deselection
Preconditions
☑ Thumbwheels are not set to neutral position.
☑ The engines are running at higher idling speed.
☑ The TROLLING LED on the portable control unit is lit.
☑ The COMMAND LED(s) on the portable control unit is/are lit.
☑ The portable control unit is in command.

Note: Wording is applicable to twin-engine plants. For single-engine plants, proceed analogously.

Deselecting Trolling mode at the portable control unit

1. Set both thumbwheels of the portable control unit to neutral position.
Result: • The gearboxes are disengaged.
• The engines are running at idling speed.
2. Press the TROLLING pushbutton.
Result: The TROLLING LED goes out: Trolling mode is no longer active.

TIM-ID: 0000017159 - 002

178 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | E532396/05E 2016-11
 3.2.4.8 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Putting out of operation

Putting portable control unit ROS 8 out of operation

1. If the vessel is under remote control: Assume command at one of the stationary control stands (→ Operating
Instructions).
Result: • The COMMAND LEDs on the portable control unit (1) go out.
• The buzzer in the portable control unit (1) sounds for two seconds (does not sound if RCS Quiet Mode is
activated).
2. Loosen union nut (5).
3. Remove the connector (4) of the portable
control unit (1) cable from the socket.
4. Fit the protective cap on the socket (6).
5. Store the portable control unit (1) in a suita-
ble place (protected against water, sea air
and direct sunlight). Store the wrist strap (3)
in the same location.
TIM-ID: 0000017152 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Portable Control Unit (Option) | 179
 3.2.5 Operation with the Emergency Panel

3.2.5.1 Switching on Emergency Panel

Preconditions
☑ Ensure that the panel is used in case of emergency only.
☑ Ensure that the propulsion plant no longer works properly using the normal control system.
☑ Ensure that all personnel is out of the engine room.
☑ Ensure that the present state of the vessel allows switching from the RCS over to the Emergency Panel,
including the temporary loss of propulsion power this entails.
☑ Engines running.
☑ Run engines down to idle speed if possible.
☑ Local mode is deactivated at Local Operating Panel LOP! No local control over the propulsion plant.

WARNING
Switching on Emergency Panel.
Risk of crushing, hurling, stumbling etc. for on-board personnel!
• Switch on Emergency Panel in case of emergency only.
• All personnel must be out of the engine room.

NOTICE
Switching on Emergency Panel.
Engine and gearbox damage possible!
• Ensure that the control system has actually failed.
• Switch on Emergency Panel in case of emergency only.

NOTICE
The previously effective engine speed setting is assumed on activating the Emergency Panel. The clutch
setting changes to “NEUTRAL”. Vessel speed may change significantly and suddenly. Uncontrolled ves-
sel movement.
Severe damage possible!
• Maintain visual contact with the surroundings of the vessel.
• Monitor and regulate vessel speed.
• Adjust engine speed within the engagement/disengagement window.

Switching on Emergency Panel

Note: When activated, the Emergency Panel assumes the previously effective engine speed setting (→ Engine docu-
mentation). The clutch setting changes to NEUTRAL.
• Vessel speed may change.
• Engine speed may be outside the engagement/disengagement window. The INTERLOCK lamp lights up on
the Emergency Panel and the “AL Backup RCS active” alarm is signaled.
1. Move the slide up to gain access to the ON/OFF pushbutton.
2. Press ON/OFF pushbutton (ON).
TIM-ID: 0000068306 - 002

Result: • The Emergency Panel assumes command of the propulsion plant.

• The start/stop PANs on each control stand, the MFD displays and the display instruments are switched on
and might display values even though the plant is currently switched off with the key switch.
• Command is transferred in NEUTRAL. The gearbox is disengaged.
• Engine speed is set to idle or remains at the previously set value depending on parameter configuration in
the Engine Control Unit (→ engine documentation).
• Visual and audible alarm signaling via the MCS (on the LOP and control stand displays), and via the MCS
interface in the case of non-MTU displays, is maintained providing that the MCS controller in the LOP is
still intact (→ Automation system documentation).
• The previously active RCS relinquishes command.

180 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.5.2 Emergency Panel – Clutch engagement
Preconditions
☑ Ensure that the panel is used in case of emergency only.
☑ Ensure that the propulsion plant no longer works properly using the normal control system.
☑ Ensure that all personnel is out of the engine room.
☑ Engines running.
☑ Local mode is deactivated at Local Operating Panel LOP! No local control over the propulsion plant.
☑ The Emergency Panel is switched on. Operating mode “Active”.

WARNING
Clutch engagement with Emergency Panel.
Risk of crushing, hurling, stumbling etc. for on-board personnel!
• Engage from neutral in current direction of rotation only.
• Engage within engagement window only.
• All personnel must be out of the engine room.

NOTICE
Clutch engagement / changing direction with Emergency Panel.
Engine and gearbox damage possible!
• Ensure that the control system has actually failed.
• Engage clutch / change direction within engagement window only. Check “INTERLOCK” indicator.

NOTICE
Vessel speed may change significantly and suddenly on switching from Local mode at Local Operating
Panel LOP to Remote mode with the Emergency Panel.
Severe damage possible!
• Maintain visual contact with the surroundings of the vessel.
• Monitor and regulate vessel speed.
• Adjust engine speed within the engagement/disengagement window.

Engaging
1. Move the slide down to gain access to the pushbuttons which control the gear (GEAR).
2. Check that the speed of the engine and the vessel allow a change of direction. Otherwise adjust the speed
(“-” pushbutton) to the engagement window (INTERLOCK indicator goes out) and wait until the vessel has
slowed accordingly if necessary.
Note: • The gear can still be engaged/disengaged even when an INTERLOCK is active.
• The engine may be unintentionally shut down if the gear is engaged in the opposite direction to that in
which the vessel is currently moving.
• Failure to observe the requirements for engagement, e.g. engagement window (see INTERLOCK indicator)
and excessive vessel speed, may incur gearbox damage.
3. Press “F” pushbutton (engage AHEAD) or “R” pushbutton (engage ASTERN) depending on the desired direc-
tion of travel.
TIM-ID: 0000068307 - 001

Result: • The gear is engaged AHEAD (F) or ASTERN (R) depending on the new setting.
• The “AL Clutch Interlock Override” alarm is signaled if the engine speed is not in the engagement window
(INTERLOCK active).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | 181

 Engaging/disengaging with the Emergency Panel when Local mode is select-
ed at Local Operating Panel LOP
Note: Emergency Panel is active.
1. Press LOCAL pushbutton on Local Operating Panel LOP.
Result: • Local Operating Panel LOP assumes engine speed and clutch state.
• Vessel speed does not change.
• The LOCAL indicator lights up on the Emergency Panel.
2. Press LOCAL pushbutton on Local Operating Panel LOP again (switches to Remote mode).
Result: • The Emergency Panel re-assumes command (not initial command).
• Engagement/disengagement commands stored in the Emergency Panel are implemented immediately.
• The Emergency Panel assumes the engine speed set at Local Operating Panel LOP.
• Gearbox damage possible!
• The LOCAL indicator goes out on the Emergency Panel.

TIM-ID: 0000068307 - 001

182 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.5.3 Change of direction with Emergency Panel
Preconditions
☑ Ensure that the panel is used in case of emergency only.
☑ Ensure that the propulsion plant no longer works properly using the normal control system.
☑ Ensure that all personnel is out of the engine room.
☑ Engines running.
☑ Local mode is deactivated at Local Operating Panel LOP! No local control over the propulsion plant.
☑ The Emergency Panel is switched on.
☑ The gear is engaged AHEAD (F) or ASTERN (R).

NOTICE
Clutch engagement / changing direction with Emergency Panel.
Engine and gearbox damage possible!
• Ensure that the control system has actually failed.
• Engage clutch / change direction within engagement window only. Check “INTERLOCK” indicator.

NOTICE
Vessel speed may change significantly and suddenly on switching from Local mode at Local Operating
Panel LOP to Remote mode with the Emergency Panel.
Severe damage possible!
• Maintain visual contact with the surroundings of the vessel.
• Monitor and regulate vessel speed.
• Adjust engine speed within the engagement/disengagement window.

Changing direction
1. Press GEAR NEUTRAL (N) pushbutton.
Result: The gear is set to NEUTRAL from engage AHEAD (F) or engage ASTERN (R).
2. Check that the speed of the engine and the vessel allow a change of direction. Otherwise adjust the speed
(“-” pushbutton) to the engagement window (INTERLOCK indicator goes out) and wait until the vessel has
slowed accordingly if necessary.
Note: • The gear can still be engaged/disengaged even when an INTERLOCK is active.
• The engine may be unintentionally shut down if the gear is engaged in the opposite direction to that in
which the vessel is currently moving.
• Failure to observe the requirements for changing direction, such as engagement window (check INTER-
LOCK indicator), excessive vessel speed etc., may incur gearbox damage.
3. Press “F” pushbutton (engage AHEAD) or the “R” pushbutton (engage ASTERN) depending on the desired
direction of travel.
Result: • The gear is engaged AHEAD (F) or ASTERN (R) depending on the new setting.
• The “AL Clutch Interlock Override” alarm is signaled if the engine speed is not in the engagement window
(INTERLOCK active).
TIM-ID: 0000068308 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | 183

 Engaging/disengaging with the Emergency Panel when Local mode is select-
ed at Local Operating Panel LOP
Note: Emergency Panel is active.
1. Press LOCAL pushbutton on Local Operating Panel LOP.
Result: • Local Operating Panel LOP assumes engine speed and clutch state.
• Vessel speed does not change.
• The LOCAL indicator lights up on the Emergency Panel.
2. Press LOCAL pushbutton on Local Operating Panel LOP again (switches to Remote mode).
Result: • The Emergency Panel re-assumes command (not initial command).
• Engagement/disengagement commands stored in the Emergency Panel are implemented immediately.
• The Emergency Panel assumes the engine speed set at Local Operating Panel LOP.
• Gearbox damage possible!
• The LOCAL indicator goes out on the Emergency Panel.

TIM-ID: 0000068308 - 001

184 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.5.4 Engine speed change with Emergency Panel
Preconditions
☑ Ensure that the panel is used in case of emergency only.
☑ Ensure that the propulsion plant no longer works properly using the normal control system.
☑ Ensure that all personnel is out of the engine room.
☑ Engines running.
☑ Local mode is deactivated at Local Operating Panel LOP! No local control over the propulsion plant.
☑ The Emergency Panel is switched on.

Changing engine speed

1. Press speed demand pushbutton (RPM) towards (+) to increase speed, or (-) to decrease speed as necessary.
Result: The speed increases or decreases accordingly.
2. Release the pushbutton as soon as the desired engine speed has been reached.
Result: • The engine speed remains constant.
TIM-ID: 0000068309 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | 185

 3.2.5.5 Emergency Panel – Switching off
Preconditions
☑ Ensure that all personnel is out of the engine room.
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ The emergency leading to activation of the Emergency Panel has passed and the control system is func-
tioning properly once more.
☑ Ensure that the present state of the vessel allows switching from the Emergency Panel over to the normal
control system, including the temporary loss of propulsion power this entails.
☑ Run engines down to idle speed and set the gear to NEUTRAL (N) (disengaged).

NOTICE
Unintentional activation of the Emergency Panel.
Engine and gearbox damage possible!
• After switching off, move the slide back down over the ON/OFF pushbutton to cover the pushbutton.

Switching off
1. Move the slide covering the ON/OFF switch up.ON/OFF
2. Press ON/OFF pushbutton.
3. If activating the panel raises an alarm at the LOP acknowledge it at the LOP.
Result: • The control system takes command of the propulsion plant.
• Command may now be assumed at one of the control stands or at the LOP (Local mode) (see Assuming
initial command (→ Page 148)).

TIM-ID: 0000068310 - 001

186 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.2.5.6 Local Operating Panel LOP – Local mode
Activating Local mode at Local Operating Panel disables operation at the Emergency Panel (→ automation
system documentation).

Emergency Panel active and Local mode selected at the Local Operating Panel
NOTICE
Vessel speed may change significantly and suddenly on switching from Local mode at Local Operating
Panel LOP to Remote mode with the Emergency Panel.
Severe damage possible!
• Maintain visual contact with the surroundings of the vessel.
• Monitor and regulate vessel speed.
• Adjust engine speed within the engagement/disengagement window.

1. The LOP assumes the engine speed and clutch state on pressing the Local pushbutton on the LOP when
the Emergency Panel is active.
• Vessel speed does not change.
2. Pressing the Local pushbutton on the Local Operating Panel again (switching to Remote mode) returns
command to the Emergency Panel instead of selecting initial command.
• Engagement/disengagement commands stored in the Emergency Panel are implemented immediate-
ly.
• Vessel speed may change significantly and suddenly (direct change of direction possible).
• Gearbox damage possible!
TIM-ID: 0000068996 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation with the Emergency Panel | 187

 3.3 Indicators and Controls in the Engine Room
3.3.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Controls and displays
Local Operating Panel LOP 13

1 Local Operating Panel 2 Control panel LOP-PAN 3 Service display observation

LOP 13 window
The service display (3) shows the key plant data and alarms on several pages.

TIM-ID: 0000038663 - 004

188 | Indicators and Controls in the Engine Room | E532396/05E 2016-11

 LOP-PAN – Pushbutton functions

No. Labeling Function

1 READY FOR OPERATION Pressing the pushbutton switches “Ready for opera-
tion” status on and off (manual start interlock).
Active signal is required to enable starting.
2 START Manual start interlock by the operator.
Pressing the pushbutton initiates the automatic
starting sequence; only possible when LED READY
FOR OPERATION is lit.
3 STOP Pressing the pushbutton initiates the stopping se-
quence.
2+3 START + STOP Pressing and holding down the STOP pushbutton (3)
and then also pressing and holding down the START
pushbutton (2) cranks (turns) the engine.
4 COMBINED ALARM Pressing the pushbutton switches the horn off.
HORN OFF
5 OVERSPEED TEST Pressing the pushbutton initiates the overspeed test.
6 EMERGENCY STOP Pressing the pushbutton initiates an emergency
TIM-ID: 0000038663 - 004

stop.
7 - Transparent slide to prevent inadvertent actuation of
the OVERSPEED TEST (5) and EMERGENCY STOP (6)
pushbuttons.

Table 48: LOP-PAN – Pushbutton functions

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls in the Engine Room | 189

 LOP-PAN – LED status indicators

No. Labeling LED color LED state Meaning

1 READY FOR OPERA- Green Lit “Ready for operation” status active,
TION start possible.
– Dark “Ready for operation” status not active,
start not possible.
Yellow Flashing “Ready for operation” status active;
however, start not possible, as starter
not ready (e.g. starter in cool-down
phase).
2 START White Flashing Engine starting sequence running. Start-
er not activated.
Lit Starter On
– Dark –
3 STOP White Flashing Engine running. Stopping sequence run-
ning.
Lit Stop command applied with engine at
TIM-ID: 0000038663 - 004

standstill.
– Dark –
4 COMBINED ALARM Yellow Flashing Unacknowledged yellow alarm applied.
HORN OFF Yellow Lit Acknowledged yellow alarm present.
Red Flashing Unacknowledged red alarm applied.
Red Lit Acknowledged red alarm present.
– Dark No alarm is applied.

190 | Indicators and Controls in the Engine Room | E532396/05E 2016-11

 No. Labeling LED color LED state Meaning
5 OVERSPEED TEST Red Lit Overspeed test is active.
– Dark Overspeed test is not active.
6 EMERGENCY STOP Red Lit Emergency stop is active.
– Dark Emergency stop is not active.
7 LED Blue Lit Power supply applied, normal operation.
Slow flashing (2 Supply voltage applied, system booting,
Hz) no connection to controller, CAN com-
munication error or unsuccessful auto-
matic node number allocation.
Rapid flash- Supply voltage applied, system does not
ing (8 Hz) boot, serious error
Red Slow flashing (2 LEDs 1 to 3 off: “Unable to allocate
Hz) node number” state active.
LEDs 1 to 3 flashing: “Display node
number” state active.
– Dark Power supply missing or low.

Table 49: LOP-PAN – LED status indicators

The LEDs indicate propulsion plant operating states or combined alarms.

The utility lamp indicates the operating states of the LOP-PAN.
TIM-ID: 0000038663 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls in the Engine Room | 191

 3.3.2 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

3.3.2.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Controls and displays

Pushbuttons to control the plant

Item Color Inscription Meaning/function
Speed pushbuttons
1 White INCREASE EN- • Holding the pushbutton down increases engine speed.
GINE SPEED • Lit as long as the pushbutton is held down.
2 White DECREASE EN- • Holding the pushbutton down decreases engine speed.
GINE SPEED • Lit as long as the pushbutton is held down.
3 White – (Not assigned)
Gearbox pushbuttons for marine reversing gear
4 Green CLUTCH • Pressing the pushbutton engages the gearbox in the ahead direc-
AHEAD* tion.
• Flashes if AHEAD is specified; however, no gearbox feedback for
ahead.
TIM-ID: 0000038583 - 005

• Lit when the gearbox is engaged ahead.

5 Green CLUTCH NEU- • Pressing the pushbutton disengages the gearbox.
TRAL* • Flashes if NEUTRAL is specified; however, no gearbox feedback
for neutral.
• Lit when the gearbox is disengaged.
6 Green CLUTCH AS- • Pressing the pushbutton engages the gearbox in the astern direc-
TERN* tion.
• Flashes if ASTERN is specified; however, no gearbox feedback for
astern.
• Lit when the gearbox is engaged astern.

192 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Color Inscription Meaning/function
Other pushbuttons
7 White START • Pressing the pushbutton initiates engine start.
• Lit during the starting sequence.
• Lit when the TURNEN pushbutton is actuated together with the
STOP pushbutton.
8 White STOP • Pressing the pushbutton initiates engine shutdown.
• Lit during the stopping sequence.
• Lit when the TURNEN pushbutton is actuated together with the
START pushbutton.
9 White TURNEN • Pressing the pushbutton initiates engine cranking.
• Lit during the cranking sequence.
10 Green OVERSPEED • Pressing the pushbutton initiates an overspeed test.
TEST • Lit during the overspeed test.
11 Green LOCAL CON- • Pressing the pushbutton activates Local mode.
TROL • Lit when Local mode is activated.
12 Green READY FOR OP- • Pressing the pushbutton switches the power train concerned
ERATION ready for operation.
The operator thus cancels the manual start interlock.
• Lit when the “Ready for Operation” status is active.
13 Red EMERGENCY • Pressing the pushbutton initiates an immediate emergency en-
STOP gine stop.
• Lit when an emergency engine stop has been tripped.
• Lit until the “Emergency engine stop” alarm is acknowledged.
14 White – (Not assigned)
15 White – (Not assigned)
* Optional/depending on plant configuration

Table 50: Meaning of pushbuttons on LOP 14

Function keys to operate the LCD display

Item Color Inscription Meaning/function
20 White F1 • Function key
19 F2 – to control and operate the graphic screen pages on the LCD
display
18 F3 – to adjust brightness of the LCD display and key illumination on
17 F4 the LOP
16 F5 • Key functions vary and are displayed graphically in the LCD win-
dow.
• The keys are lit when held down.

Table 51: Function keys to operate the LCD display

TIM-ID: 0000038583 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 193

 Additional displays and indicators
Item Color Designation Meaning/function
21 Green Function LED Indicates display operating state:
• LED dark: Operating voltage missing.
• LED lit: Normal operation, project configuration data loaded, no
error detected.
• LED flashes slowly: Communication to display via field bus (CAN)
disrupted or failed.
• LED flashes rapidly: Watchdog tripped. System in hardware reset
state.
22 – LCD display • Displays detailed information about the propulsion plant.
• The display can be controlled with the function keys below the
window.

Table 52: Additional displays and indicators – LOP 14

TIM-ID: 0000038583 - 005

194 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.3.2.2 Display on LOP 14 – Screen pages, navigation and function keys
General screen page layout

Item Description Meaning/function

1 Page Name of displayed screen page
2 Combined alarm display field “Common Alarm” is displayed in this field when at
least one alarm is pending; the field is otherwise
blank.
The background of the field
• is red when at least one red alarm is applied (ac-
knowledged or unacknowledged).
• is yellow when at least one yellow alarm is applied
but no red alarm.
• is light blue when messages are applied but no
yellow or red alarm.
The text
• flashes as long as at least one unacknowledged
alarm is applied.
• does not flash when all applied alarms have been
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

acknowledged and no new alarm has occurred

since.
3 Alarm display field Number of alarms applied
4 Override display field The appropriate text appears in this field when safe-
ty system override is active; the field is otherwise
blank.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 195

 Item Description Meaning/function
5 System status display field The following messages can be displayed:
• Initiali
System initialization
• Bus error
CAN bus inactive (timeout or error)
• Bootup Sys
Testing of current system software
• Download Sys
Downloading system software
• Bootup Prj
Testing of current configuration data
• Download Prj
Project configuration data download
• BDM OK
• BDM receiving
• BDM PPS Error
6 Message window Displays relevant user prompts
7 Status bar –
8 Central display area Displays individual graphic or text pages
9 Function key assignment Indicates assignment of function keys F1 to F5 on
the currently selected screen page.

Screen page hierarchy

TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

Item Description Meaning/function

Pages
O Overview Page List of available screen pages

196 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Description Meaning/function
1 Propulsion Basic Graphic representation of the most important meas-
ured values and states of the propulsion plant
1.1 Fuel Consumption Display of various data related to fuel consumption
1.2 ECU Overview Graphic representation of exhaust turbocharger
speeds from Engine Control Unit ECU
1.3 ECU Pressures Graphic representation of measured pressure values
from Engine Control Unit ECU
1.4 ECU Pressures Graphic representation of measured pressure values
from Engine Control Unit ECU
1.5 ECU Temperatures Graphic representation of measured temperature
values from Engine Control Unit ECU
1.6 ECU Temperatures Graphic representation of measured temperature
values from Engine Control Unit ECU
1.7 Gearbox Values (pressure/temp.) Graphic representation of measured gearbox values
and states
2 Propulsion Extended Graphic representation of the most important meas-
ured values and states of the propulsion plant
2.1 Fuel Consumption Displays various data related to fuel consumption
2.2 ECU Overview Graphic representation of exhaust turbocharger
speeds from Engine Control Unit ECU
2.3 ECU Pressures Graphic representation of measured pressure values
from Engine Control Unit ECU
2.4 ECU Pressures Graphic representation of measured pressure values
from Engine Control Unit ECU
2.5 ECU Pressures Graphic representation of measured pressure values
from optional extended Engine Monitoring Unit EMU
2.6 ECU Temperatures Graphic representation of measured temperature
values from Engine Control Unit ECU
2.7 ECU Temperatures Graphic representation of measured temperature
values from Engine Control Unit ECU
2.8 ECU Temperatures Graphic representation of measured exhaust gas
temperature values from Engine Control Unit ECU (A
side)
2.9 ECU Temperatures Graphic representation of measured exhaust gas
temperature values from Engine Control Unit ECU (B
side)
2.10 Engine Bearing Temperature Graphic representation of measured bearing temper-
ature values from Engine Control Unit ECU
2.11 Spray Oil Temperature Graphic representation of measured spray oil tem-
perature values from Engine Control Unit ECU
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

2.12 Gearbox Values Graphic representation of measured gearbox values

and states
3 Safety System Graphic representation of measured temperature
values from Engine Control Unit ECU
3.1 Gearbox Values Graphic representation of measured gearbox values
and states
4 Measuring Point List Displays measured values in text form
4.1 Software Interface Version Displays information about the software interfaces in
text form

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 197

 Item Description Meaning/function
5 Error Ring Buffer List of all faults which have occurred
6 Brightness Setting Page Brightness adjustment for LOP controls, indicators
and displays
7 Service Page Displays and modifies system settings (automation
system and graphic display)
8 System Page Displays information about the automation system
and graphic display in text form
9 BDM Page Displays configuration data stored and used by the
automation system
A Alarm Page Displays alarms including color and state
H1 Help Page 1/2 Explains abbreviations used in alarm messages
H2 Help Page 2/2 Explains abbreviations used in alarm messages
Navigation
E Enter (function key F5) Opens page selected in list
F2 Function key F2 Opens Alarm Page or Help Pages
F3 Function key F3 Selects page for display from list or scrolls through
pages belonging together
F4 Function key F4 Selects page for display from list or scrolls through
pages belonging together
F5 Function key F5 Returns to higher-level page or Overview Page

TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

198 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Symbols on pages with graphic representations
Barcharts

1 Designation of displayed 5 First lower limit value (yel- 9 Second upper limit value
measured variable low) (red)
2 Measured value barchart 6 Second lower limit value 10 First upper limit value (yel-
3 Unit (red) low)
4 Scale 7 Alphanumeric measured val-
ue display
8 Unit
Analog values are represented as barcharts, e.g.
• Speeds
• Injection quantity
• Temperatures
• Pressures
One of the following abbreviations is displayed in place of the numerical value if it violates the valid measur-
ing range:
SD Sensor defect
MD Missing Data
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

## Value out of range

The barchart remains blank in such cases.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 199

 Power train

Binary states of the power train components are represented schematically together with additional informa-
tion.
Item Designation Meaning/function
1 Priming text field Text displayed on a green background when the op-
tional lube-oil priming pump is running.
2 Remote mode text field Text displayed on a green background when the
power train is being controlled by the remote control
system.
3 Graphic symbol for engine (CC mode) • Green when engine is running (idling speed or
higher) and cylinder cutout is inactive.
• Gray when engine is running (idling speed or high-
er) and cylinder cutout is active (CC mode).
• Gray when engine is shut down.
4 Graphic symbol for engine • Green when engine is running (idling speed or
higher) regardless of cylinder cutout.
• Gray when engine is shut down.
5 Graphic symbol for exhaust turbochargers Green when corresponding exhaust turbocharger is
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

cut in.
6 Special operating mode text field Text displayed on a green background when the cor-
responding optional operating mode is active.
Examples:
• Trolling for FPP
• Backflush for WJ

200 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Designation Meaning/function
7 Graphic symbol for gearbox • Two connected disks, both green: Engaged
• Two separate disks, one green, one gray: Disen-
gaged
• Gray rectangle: No clutch feedback, undefined
state
8 Graphic symbol for gearbox state E.g. Arrow up = Engaged ahead

Screen pages in detail

Overview Page

The pages on the highest level of the hierarchy (→ Page 196) can be selected for display with a bar on this
page.
The entries available for selection are umbrella terms which may lead to pages on lower levels of the hierar-
chy. Example: The following pages can be opened one-by-one via the ECU entry:
• ECU Overview
• ECU Status,
• ECU Pressure and
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

• ECU Temperature

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 201

 Engine overview

The most important engine operating data are displayed in large letters in the display field of this page:
• Engine speed (revolutions per minute)
• Injection quantity (percent)
• Coolant temperature (degrees Celsius)
• Lube oil pressure (bar)
• Exhaust turbocharger ETC 2: The field is green when the turbocharger is cut in.

TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

202 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Fuel Consumption

Fuel consumption data are shown in the display field of this page.
The unit of volume for the values indicated can be switched between liters or liters/hour and gallons or gal-
lons/hour on the Service Page.
• Current fuel consumption
• Average fuel consumption since departure;
display can be reset with F1 key.
• Total fuel consumption since Engine Control Unit ECU was taken into operation.
• Overall fuel consumption since departure;
display can be reset with F1 key.
• Duration of voyage;
display can be reset with F1 key.
• The number of seconds for which the F1 key must be held down in order to reset the average and overall
fuel consumption displays back to zero is indicated at the bottom of the page.
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 203

 Brightness Page

The brightness set for LOP pushbutton and LCD background illumination is represented as a barchart in the
display area of this page.
The brightness can be adjusted using the function keys when this page is displayed .

TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

204 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Error Annular Memory

All alarm events (occurrence and acknowledgment) which have occurred since the last reset, and a number
of events relevant for system maintenance, are recorded in the display area of this page in the order of their
occurrence. Up to 1000 messages can be stored here.
The list can be cleared via the Service Page.
The display area is divided into five columns:
1. Annular memory capacity in the form of a barchart
2. Message text
• Abbreviation (→ Table 53)
• Alarm designation
3. Date of occurrence/acknowledgment
4. Time of occurrence/acknowledgment
5. Alarm status
• 1 = Unacknowledged
• 0 = Acknowledged
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 205

 Measuring Point List

A number of configured variables are displayed alphanumerically in the display area of this page.
• Status of binary values (yes, no)
• Analog values with units of measure
Invalid measured values are indicated as follows:
SD Sensor defect
MD Missing Data
## Value out of range

TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

206 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 System Page

The System Page opens automatically in case of system error.

Software information and system status are indicated in the display area of this page:
• Project Version: Internal counter
• Security status no: Internal counter
• Display Temperature: Temperature inside the display
• Graphic Version: Version number of the order-related application software
• QVis Version: Version number of the QVis software with which the application software was developed
• Term Version: Version number of the functional software of the LOP
• Status CAN 1: Operating state of the default CAN bus
• Status CAN 2: Operating state of the redundant CAN bus
• Systems State: Operating state of the system
• Internal State: Internal message from the display
The language of all display pages can be changed by pressing the F3 key when this page is displayed.
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 207

 Service Page

On this page
• system settings are displayed (display mode),
• system settings can be modified (Edit mode).

Displayed settings
Important system variables on the Service Page:
• CAN Baud Rate
– 125 kbit/s
– 250 Kbit/s
• CAN Node Number
– 1 to 31
• Node Guarding
– Off = Node guarding disabled
– Active = Node guarding is active
• BDM Function
– (Not used)
• Unit Switching
– System of units used for the variables displayed on other pages
• Acknowledgment of individual alarms
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

– On: Alarms must be acknowledged individually line-by-line.

– Off: All alarms are acknowledged at once
• Reset Error Ring Buffer
– Resets the alarm memory on the Error Annular Memory Page
• Horn
– On = Internal horn (of display in LOP) is activated.
– Off = Internal horn (of display in LOP) is deactivated.
• Horn Test
– On = Start horn test
– Off = Stop horn test

208 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Service Page in Display mode
• The Service Page opens automatically in Display mode approx. 20 seconds after booting has been com-
pleted.
• A lamp test can be performed in Display mode by pressing the F3 key.

Service Page in Edit mode

• To open in Edit mode: Actively open the Service Page from the Overview Page within 20 seconds after
booting has been completed.
• The settings for CAN baud rate, CAN node number and node guarding must not be changed as this leads
to failure of the LOP.
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 209

 Alarm Page

The total number of alarms is indicated on the display in the status bar (on every page).
Pending alarms are listed in chronological order of their occurrence in the display area of the Alarm Page.
The display area is divided into three columns:
1. Message text
• Abbreviation (→ Table 53)
• Alarm designation
2. Alarm status (→ Table 54)
3. Alarm type (light blue, yellow, red; (→ Table 55)
Alarm display sequence:
• Any new alarm is initially listed as an unacknowledged alarm with status UNACK at the bottom of the
alarm list. The text flashes in this state.
• The status changes to UARTN if the alarm is canceled before the operator acknowledges it. The text con-
tinues flashing.
• When the operator acknowledges the alarm its status changes to ACK, flashing stops and the text lights
up steadily.
• The alarm remains in the list until it no longer applies.
Entry Explanation
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

AL... Alarm
Warning or alarm raised by a binary signal
DL... Default Lost
Warning raised by node failure on the default field bus
HI... High
Warning or alarm due to upper limit violation (analog signal)
LO... Low
Warning or alarm due to low-limit violation (analog signal)

210 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Entry Explanation
MG... Message
Message from external system or device
RL... Redundancy Lost
Warning due to a system error
SD... Sensor Defective
Warning or alarm raised by a sensor defect
SE... System Error
Warning raised by node failure on the default field bus
SF... Switch Fault
Warning or raised by inadmissible combination of states of two complementary
switches
SS... Safety System
TD... Transmitter Deviation
Warning or alarm raised by excessive deviation between the analog values of two
complementary switches

Table 53: Standardized abbreviations for alarm designations (first column)

Entry Explanation
UNACK Unacknowledged alarm
Fault message is active and has remained unacknowledged since last occurrence.
UARTN Unacknowledged Returned Alarm
Fault message was active and disappeared again before it was acknowledged.
ACK Acknowledged Alarm
Fault message was acknowledged by operator and is active.

Table 54: Standardized abbreviations in the alarm lines (second column)

Color Entry Explanation
Light blue – Message without warning or alarm meaning
Yellow Yel Warning (yellow alarm)
Red Red Alarm (red alarm)

Table 55: Standardized colors in the alarm lines and abbreviations (third column)

Function keys F1 to F5
The display is operated with the five function keys F1 to F5 below the screen. The key functions vary depend-
ing on the screen page displayed. The current function is indicated by symbols on the bottom edge of the
screen page.
The figure below illustrates function key assignment on the various screen pages in an overview.
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 211

 1 Overview Page 4 Brightness Page 7 System Page
2 All pages not listed here 5 Service Page in Display 8 Error ring buffer
3 Alarm Page mode
6 Service Page in Edit mode
BDM Page
Symbol Key Meaning/function
F1 Alarm acknowledgment:
• Press once: Horn in LOP is silenced.
• Press again: All unacknowledged alarms, warnings and
messages are acknowledged.
– Alarm acknowledgment not possible

F2 Open Alarm Page.

F3 Up.
Depending on page displayed:
• Select previous menu option or entry on the page
• Scroll up page-by-page
• Scroll up section-by-section
TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

- Highest level reached. Scrolling down is no longer possi-

ble.
F4 Down.
Depending on page displayed:
• Select next menu option or entry on the page
• Scroll down page-by-page
• Scroll down section-by-section
- Lowest level reached. Scrolling down is no longer possible.

212 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Symbol Key Meaning/function
F5 On the Overview Page: Opens selected page.

F2 On the Service Page in Edit mode :Select input fields

• Selected input box is represented inversely.
• The input value concerned is activated for editing.
F5 Open Overview Page

F2 Open the (first) Help Page

F5 Return from Alarm Page to previously selected page.

F1 Increases brightness in stages:

• LCD background illumination
• Illuminated pushbuttons
• LED for operating status display
F2 Reduces brightness in stages:
• LCD background illumination
• Illuminated pushbuttons
• LED for operating status display
F1 1. Changes made to active variables are not saved in the
memory.
2. Exits the input box.
F3 Modify:
• Increases the input value.
• Switch to next available value.
F4 Modify:
• Decreases the input value.
• Switch to previous available value.
F3 Lamp test:
• All illuminated pushbuttons and indicator lamps on LOP
light up brightly.
F3 Select language for screen display:
• Each key stroke switches to the next available lan-
guage.
F2 Scroll down 50 entries in the fault ring memory:
• Hold down key , simultaneously press key
or to scroll.

Table 56: Meanings of symbols

TIM-ID: 0000068089 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 213

 3.3.2.3 Priming Pump Controller PPC – Controls and indicators
Controls and indicators

1 Indicator lamp “Oil priming 2 Rotary switch for oil priming

pump ON” pump
Switch settings/operating modes:
0 OFF
AU- Automatic mode
TO • The engine is primed for a programmable period on pressing the START pushbutton on control pan-
el PAN 9 or LOP 14.
MAN Manual (manual mode)
• Not necessary for normal engine operation.
• Used for initial priming when the engine has been out of use for a longer period.
TIM-ID: 0000040037 - 002

214 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.4 Operation in the Engine Room
3.4.1 Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

3.4.1.1 Engine – Switching ready for operation

Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ READY FOR OPERATION LED on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 is dark.

Switching engine ready for operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

Note: The status of this function remains unchanged when the overall system is switched off at the key switch. The
engine plant remains switched ready for operation when switched back on.
1. Check that individual propulsion components are ready for operation (plant operator).
2. Press READY FOR OPERATION pushbutton.
Result: • READY FOR OPERATION LED lit.
• Engine is ready for starting providing that no start interlocks are applied.
TIM-ID: 0000038664 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation in the Engine Room | 215

 3.4.1.2 Engine – Start-up
Preconditions
☑ Engine has been prepared for start-up (→ Engine Operating Instructions).
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ No start interlocks applied.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: LED READY FOR OPERATION on Local Operating Panel LOP
13 lit green.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.

Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

Note: The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton.
u Press START pushbutton.
Result: • LED START flashes.
TIM-ID: 0000038666 - 004

• Automatic starting sequence is executed.

• The starting sequence is represented on the control stand (or control stands if several are included) in the
same way as a normal engine start (→ Page 143).
• LED START lights up when the starter engages.
• The engine runs at idling speed on completion of the starting sequence and light emitting diode START
goes out.
• The power train is ready for engagement.

216 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.4.1.3 Engine start-up (with optional PPC)
Preconditions
☑ Engine ready for start-up (→ Engine Operating Instructions).
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ No start interlocks applied.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: LED READY FOR OPERATION on Local Operating Panel LOP
13 lit green.
☑ Priming Pump Controller PPC selector switch is set to AUTO.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.

Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

Note: The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton.
u
TIM-ID: 0000038667 - 004

Press START pushbutton.

Result: • LED START flashes.
• Automatic starting sequence is executed.
• Oil priming pump is switched on as necessary (no priming in case of repeated starting, depending on EIM
settings).
• The starting sequence is represented on the control stand (or control stands if several are included) in the
same way as a normal engine start (→ Page 143).
• LED START lights up when the starter engages.
• The engine runs at idling speed on completion of the starting sequence and light emitting diode START
goes out.
• The power train is ready for engagement.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 | 217

 3.4.1.4 Engine shutdown
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Engine running.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

Stopping engine at LOP 13

1. Press STOP pushbutton.
Result: • Stop LED flashes.
• Automatic stopping sequence is executed.
• Display shows changing engine operating data.
• LED STOP lights up when the engine speed has fallen below 300 rpm.
• The engine is at a standstill when the automatic stopping sequence has been completed and the LED goes
out.
• Gearbox is disengaged.
2. Repeat procedure for other engines (if applicable).
Result: • The stopping sequence is repeated in the same way as for the first engine.
3. Perform engine-related tasks which are required after an engine stop (→ Engine Operating Instructions).

TIM-ID: 0000038669 - 003

218 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.4.1.5 Engine start – Interlock
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: READY FOR OPERATION LED on Local Operating Panel LOP
13 lit green.

Interlocking engine starting at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

Note: The status of this function remains unchanged when the overall system is switched off at the key switch.
Engine start remains interlocked for this engine plant when the system is switched back on.
1. Press READY FOR OPERATION pushbutton.
Result: • READY FOR OPERATION LED goes out.
• The engine cannot be started.
2. Repeat procedure for other engines (if applicable).
Result: • The sequence is repeated in the same way as for the first engine.
TIM-ID: 0000038671 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 | 219

 3.4.1.6 Engine – Emergency shutdown
Preconditions
☑ Engine running.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
An emergency stop subjects the engine system to an extremely high load.
Risk of overheating, damage to components!
• Trigger an emergency stop only in emergency situations.

Emergency engine shutdown at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

1. Slide the locking device on control panel LOP-PAN up until it engages.
2. Press EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton.
Result: • LED EMERGENCY STOP lit red.
• Alarm horn sounds.
• LED COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF flashes.
• Alarm is signaled on the control stand (or control stands if there are several) analogous to an emergency
stop from the control stand (→ Page 147).
• Engine is shut down by the emergency shutdown feature:
– On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Flaps close.
– Engine is shut down by interrupting fuel injection.
– Alarm is signaled at control stand.
3. Slide the locking device on control panel LOP-PAN down until it engages.
4. Press COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF pushbutton.
Result: • The alarm horn is silenced.
• LED COMBINED ALARM HORN OFF flashes.
5. Alarm acknowledgment on control stand:
• On Basic DIS (→ Page 93)
• On display MFD (→ Page 242)
Result: LED COMBINED ALARM / HORN OFF lights up.
6. On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Open flaps manually.
Result: Engine is ready for starting.
TIM-ID: 0000038695 - 004

220 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.4.2 Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional)

3.4.2.1 Engine – Switching ready for operation

Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 is dark.

Switching engine ready for operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

Note: The status of this function remains unchanged when the overall system is switched off at the keyswitch. The
engine plant remains switched ready for operation when switched back on.
1. Check that individual propulsion components are ready for operation (plant operator).
2. Press illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION lights up green.
• The manual start interlock is canceled.
• Engine is ready for starting.
TIM-ID: 0000039796 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | 221

 3.4.2.2 Local mode – Activation
Preconditions
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ No start interlocks applied.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

Activating Local mode at Local Operating Panel 14

1. Press illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL..
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL lights up green.
• Controls on the Local Operating Panel LOP 14 are activated.
• The power train can no longer be controlled via Remote Control System RCS-6 and Monitoring and Con-
trol System MCS-6.
• Emergency engine stop can still be initiated from all control stands (→ Page 147).
• Local mode is activated.
2. Operation continues at Local Operating Panel LOP 14.

TIM-ID: 0000038665 - 003

222 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.4.2.3 Local mode – Engine start-up
Preconditions
☑ Engine has been prepared for start-up (→ Engine Operating Instructions).
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ No start interlocks applied.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.
☑ Gearbox is disengaged: Illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH NEUTRAL on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 lit
green.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.

Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

TIM-ID: 0000039797 - 003

1. Switch on Local mode (→ Page 222).

Note: The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton.
2. Press illuminated pushbutton START.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton START lights up white.
• Automatic starting sequence is executed.
• The starting sequence is represented on the control stand (or control stands if several are included) in the
same way as a normal engine start (→ Page 143).
• The engine runs at idling speed on completion of the start sequence.
• Illuminated pushbutton START goes out.
• The power train is ready for engagement.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | 223

 3.4.2.4 Local mode – Engine start-up (with optional PPC)
Preconditions
☑ Engine ready for start-up (→ Engine Operating Instructions).
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ No start interlocks applied.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.
☑ Gearbox is disengaged: Illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH NEUTRAL on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 lit
green.
☑ Priming Pump Controller PPC selector switch is set to AUTO.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.
TIM-ID: 0000039798 - 003

224 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 14
1. Switch on Local mode (→ Page 222).
Note: The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton.
2. Press illuminated pushbutton START.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton START lights up white.
• Automatic starting sequence is executed.
• Oil priming pump is switched on as necessary (no priming in case of repeated starting).
• The starting sequence is represented on the control stand (or control stands if several are included) in the
same way as a normal engine start (→ Page 143).
• The engine runs at idling speed on completion of the start sequence.
• Illuminated pushbutton START goes out.
• The power train is ready for engagement.
TIM-ID: 0000039798 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | 225

 3.4.2.5 Local control mode – Gearbox engagement/disengagement
Preconditions
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.
☑ Local mode is switched on: Illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 lit
green.
☑ Gearbox disengaged: Illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH NEUTRAL on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 is lit
green (for “engagement” sequence only).
☑ Gearbox engaged: Illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH NEUTRAL on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 is dark (for
“disengagement” sequence only).
☑ Engine speed in engagement/disengagement window.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

Engaging gearbox at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1. Make contact with the control stand.
2. Press one of the following pushbuttons to engage as required:
• To engage ahead: illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH AHEAD
TIM-ID: 0000039799 - 006

• To engage astern: illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH ASTERN

Result: • Gearbox is engaged as specified.
• The selected illuminated pushbutton lights up green.
• Gearbox state is indicated on the display.

226 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Disengaging gearbox at Local Operating Panel LOP 14
1. Reduce engine speed to idling (→ Page 228).
2. Press illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH NEUTRAL.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton CLUTCH NEUTRAL lit green.
• Gearbox is disengaged.
• Gearbox state is indicated on the display.
TIM-ID: 0000039799 - 006

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | 227

 3.4.2.6 Local control mode – Changing engine speed
Preconditions
☑ Fully integrated system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.
☑ Local control mode is switched on: Illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL on Local Operating Panel
LOP 14 lit green.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

Changing engine speed at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1. Press and hold down one of the following illuminated pushbuttons as required:
• To increase engine speed: Illuminated pushbutton ENGINE SPEED INCREASE
• To decrease engine speed: Illuminated pushbutton ENGINE SPEED DECREASE
Result: • The selected illuminated pushbutton lights up white when pressed.
• Engine speed increases or decreases.
• Current engine speed is indicated on the display.
2. Release the illuminated pushbutton as soon as the desired engine speed has been reached.
Result: Engine speed remains constant.
TIM-ID: 0000039800 - 006

228 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.4.2.7 Engine – Shutdown
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.
☑ Local control mode is switched on: Illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL on Local Operating Panel
LOP 14 lit green.
☑ Engine running at idling speed.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

Stopping engine at LOP 14

1. Press illuminated pushbutton STOP.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton STOP lit white.
• The automatic stopping sequence is carried out.
• Display shows changing engine operating data.
• The engine is at a standstill when the automatic stopping sequence has been completed.
• Illuminated pushbutton STOP goes out.
• The gearbox is disengaged.
2. Repeat the procedure for other engines (if applicable).
Result: • The stopping sequence is repeated in the same way as for the first engine.
3. Perform engine-related tasks which are required after stopping engine (→ Engine Operating Instructions).
TIM-ID: 0000039801 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | 229

 3.4.2.8 Local mode – Deactivation
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Local mode is activated: Illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 lit
green.

Deactivating Local mode at Local Operating Panel 14

1. Press illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL..
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton LOCAL CONTROL goes out.
• Local mode is deactivated.
• The power train can be controlled via Remote Control System RCS-6 and Monitoring and Control System
MCS-6.
2. Select control stand (→ Page 149).

TIM-ID: 0000038670 - 001

230 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.4.2.9 Engine start – interlock (manual start interlock)
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.

Interlocking engine starting at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

Note: The status of this function remains unchanged when the overall system is switched off at the keyswitch. En-
gine start remains interlocked for this engine plant when the system is switched back on.
1. Press illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION goes out.
• The engine cannot be started.
2. Repeat procedure for other engines (if applicable).
Result: • The sequence is repeated in the same way as for the first engine.
TIM-ID: 0000039803 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | 231

 3.4.2.10 Engine – Emergency shutdown
Preconditions
☑ Engine running.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
An emergency stop subjects the engine system to an extremely high load.
Risk of overheating, damage to components!
• Trigger an emergency stop only in emergency situations.

Emergency engine shutdown at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1. Lift the protective flap covering the illuminated pushbutton EMERGENCY STOP.
2. Press illuminated pushbutton EMERGENCY STOP.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton EMERGENCY STOP lit red.
• Alarm horn sounds.
• Alarm is signaled on the control stand (or control stands if there are several) analogous to an emergency
stop from the control stand (→ Page 147).
• Engine is shut down by the emergency shutdown feature:
– On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Flaps close.
– Engine is shut down by interrupting fuel injection.
3. Close the protective flap.
4. Acknowledge alarm at Local Operating Panel LOP 14.
5. Determine and rectify the cause of the shutdown.
6. Open flaps manually on engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps.
Result: Engine is ready for starting. TIM-ID: 0000039802 - 004

232 | Operation at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.5 Troubleshooting
3.5.1 System faults
General information about faults
Faults in the overall system and propulsion plant are displayed on devices of the various BlueVision NG Basic
subsystems as follows:
• Local Control Panel LOP 13: Light emitting diodes on control panel LOP-PAN.
• Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional): On-screen messages in plain text on the display
• Main control stand: On-screen messages in plain text on the display.
• Remote Control System RCS-6 / Monitoring and Control System MCS-6: Fault indication by means of
LEDs.
• Remote Control System RCS-6 / Monitoring and Control System MCS-6: Fault code numbers are dis-
played together with brief instructions on the two-line alphanumeric service display on Local Operating
Panel LOP 13 or Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (optional).
Always check the following points first if a fault occurs when the overall system is switched on:
• Is it a phantom fault (e.g. because the system is in Local mode)?
• Have all the necessary requirements for the operating procedure during which the fault occurs been fulfil-
led?
• Is the fault indicated on a display or one of the devices described above? Should this be the case, check
the fault code in the relevant fault code table and take appropriate counteraction.
Proceed in accordance with the troubleshooting table if no fault message is displayed or if a fault occurs
when the overall system has just been switched on.
Check all fuses and the power supply if entire subsystems are out of order.

Recommended action in case of alarm

Yellow alarm:
The engine can still be operated providing that automatic engine shutdown to protect the engine has not
been configured or is not tripped. Contact Service immediately/start fault rectification.
Red alarm:
Caution, the engine is running at its limits. Shut down manually without further delay if the engine does not
shut itself down immediately after a red alarm is signaled.

Alarm handling
The skipper must determine the cause of any alarm which occurs and respond accordingly on the basis of
the available information.
In some cases, for alarms which do not lead to automatic engine shutdown, it is sufficient to decrease en-
gine power by reducing engine speed.
Alarms caused by an inadequate supply of fluids and lubricants to the engine must be cleared immediately
by carrying out appropriate repair work on the engine.
TIM-ID: 0000038878 - 001

Important information about the fault code tables

Appropriate MTU qualifications/training are a requirement for performing troubleshooting activities.
Contact Service if troubleshooting according to the information provided in the tables below proves unsuc-
cessful.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Troubleshooting | 233

 Fault tables
• Symptoms (→ Page 235)
• Faults indicated on PAN 9 control panels (→ Page 239)
• Faults indicated on the service display of the LOP (→ Page 240)
• Faults indicated on portable control unit ROS 8 (→ Page 243)

TIM-ID: 0000038878 - 001

234 | Troubleshooting | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.5.2 Troubleshooting

The troubleshooting table below can be used to pinpoint the causes of faults which are not signaled by the
indication, display or alarm systems.
Applicable to all troubleshooting activities:
• Various sub-sections of the system are protected by fuses. Check that none of these fuses have been
tripped before taking further action.
• The entire system is equipped with self-restoring fuses. Always switch the system off, wait five minutes
and then switch back on first before continuing troubleshooting.

After switching on the system no LED is switched on on at least one command

unit.
Cause Corrective action
No operating voltage. u Check Local Operating Panel LOP power supply .
Cabling between Local Operating u Check cabling.
Panel LOP and command unit is
faulty.

A propulsion control lever on a command unit is out of order.

Cause Corrective action
Single Control Lever mode is u Deactivate Single Control Lever mode (→ Page 164).
active.
Connector on command unit is 1. Connect connector correctly or disconnect and reconnect it
incorrectly connected or its several times to clean the contacts.
contacts are oxidized. 2. Clean connector contacts with isopropyl alcohol.
Connector not plugged into Local u Connect connector concerned properly and secure with locking
Operating Panel LOP correctly. screws:
• X5 for main control stand and slave control stands 2 and 4 (if
applicable)
• X6 for slave control stands 1, 3 and 5 (if applicable)
Command unit faulty. u Replace command unit (→ Page 290).

Command unit LEDs on, Speed cannot be set with any propulsion control
lever.
Cause Corrective action
LOP 14 (optional): Local mode is u LOP 14 (optional): Deactivate Local mode (→ Page 230).
activated.
Local Operating Panel LOP is u Replace Local Operating Panel:
faulty. • LOP 13 (→ Page 324)
TIM-ID: 0000040038 - 002

• LOP 14 (→ Page 353) (optional)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Troubleshooting | 235

 One or more controls and indicators do not light up when the overall system is
switched on.
Cause Corrective action
Light emitting diode is faulty. u Replace faulty device:
• Control panel PAN 9 (→ Page 303)
• Control panel LOP-PAN (→ Page 319)
• Replace Systembus Processing Unit SPU:
– on LOP 13 (→ Page 321)
– on LOP 14 (→ Page 350) (optional)
• Basic DIS (→ Page 292)
• Display MFD (→ Page 328) (optional)
No electrical connection between u Replace faulty device:
LED and element (contacts • Control panel PAN 9 (→ Page 303)
oxidized, bent or coated with salt). • Control panel LOP PAN (→ Page 319)
• Replace Systembus Processing Unit SPU:
– on LOP 13 (→ Page 321)
– on LOP 14 (→ Page 350) (optional)
• Basic DIS (→ Page 292)
• Display MFD (→ Page 328) (optional)

No illumination of individual analog display instruments.

Cause Corrective action
Lamp faulty. u Replace display instrument (→ Page 291).
Plug-in base not plugged into the u Insert plug-in base in the opening in the housing.
housing of the instrument
concerned.
Connector on plug-in base of the 1. Connect connector correctly or disconnect and reconnect it
instrument concerned several times to clean the contacts.
misconnected or oxidized. 2. Clean connector contacts with isopropyl alcohol.

Pointers of all analog display instruments of a power train are at the -10°
position.
Cause Corrective action
Connector not plugged into Local 1. Connect connector concerned properly and secure with locking
Operating Panel LOP correctly: screws:
• X5 for main control stand and slave control stands 2 and 4 (if
applicable)
• X6 for slave control stands 1, 3 and 5 (if applicable)
2. Connect connector properly and secure with locking screws.
CAN bus communication is u Switch power train off and back on.
disrupted.
TIM-ID: 0000040038 - 002

Cable faulty. u Replace cable.

236 | Troubleshooting | E532396/05E 2016-11

 All indicator lamps on a control stand for one power train out of order.
Cause Corrective action
Connector not plugged into Local u Connect connector concerned properly and secure with locking
Operating Panel LOP correctly: screws:
• X5 for main control stand and slave control stands 2 and 4 (if
applicable)
• X6 for slave control stands 1, 3 and 5 (if applicable)
Systembus Processing Unit SPU is u Replace Systembus Processing Unit SPU:
faulty. • on LOP 13 (→ Page 321)
• on LOP 14 (→ Page 350) (optional)
Grounding lead disrupted. u Replace cable.

Problems with operation or indication on the Basic DIS.

Cause Corrective action
Display faulty. u Replace Basic DIS (→ Page 292).

Basic DIS screen pressed in.

Cause Corrective action
Display faulty. u Replace Basic DIS (→ Page 292).

Problems with operation or indication on the MFD display (optional).

Cause Corrective action
Display faulty. u Replace MFD display (optional) (→ Page 328)

MFD display screen pressed in.

Cause Corrective action
Display faulty. u Replace MFD display (optional) (→ Page 328)

Display screen in front panel LOS 3 of Local Operating Panel LOP 13 pressed
in.
Cause Corrective action
Window is faulty. u Replace LOS 3 front panel (→ Page 317).

Service display on SPU of Local Operating Panel LOP pressed in.

Cause Corrective action
TIM-ID: 0000040038 - 002

Display faulty. u Replace Systembus Processing Unit SPU:

• on LOP 13 (→ Page 321)
• on LOP 14 (→ Page 350) (optional)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Troubleshooting | 237

 Engine cannot be started at control stand.
Cause Corrective action
Control panel Start/Stop PAN not u See troubleshooting for “One or more controls and indicators do
ready for operation. not light up when the overall system is switched on” in this table.
LOP 14 (optional): Local mode is u LOP 14 (optional): Deactivate Local mode (→ Page 230).
activated.

Engine cannot be stopped at control stand.

Cause Corrective action
Control panel Start/Stop PAN not u See troubleshooting for “One or more controls and indicators do
ready for operation. not light up when the overall system is switched on” in this table.
LOP 14 (optional): Local mode is u LOP 14 (optional): Deactivate Local mode (→ Page 230).
activated.

Speed cannot be set with any propulsion control lever.

Cause Corrective action
Local Operating Panel LOP is u Replace Local Operating Panel:
faulty. • LOP 13 (→ Page 321)
• LOP 14 (→ Page 350) (optional)
LOP 14 (optional): Local mode is u LOP 14 (optional): Deactivate Local mode (→ Page 230).
activated.

Problems with operation of display at control panel LOP-PAN of Local

Operating Panel LOP 13.
Cause Corrective action
Connector X1 not plugged in u Check lock of connector X1 in socket on LOP-PAN .
correctly.
Control panel LOP-PAN is faulty. u Replace control panel LOP-PAN (→ Page 319).

Problems with operation or indication on control panel or display of Local

Operating Panel LOP 14.
Cause Corrective action
Connector X1 not plugged in u Check lock of connector X1 in socket on printed circuit board of
correctly. display DIS.
Board of display DIS is faulty. u Replace LOS 4 front panel (→ Page 343).
TIM-ID: 0000040038 - 002

238 | Troubleshooting | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.5.3 Troubleshooting – Control panel PAN 9
Operating lamp is off
Cause Corrective action
Connector X1 not plugged in u Check lock of connector X1 in socket on PAN 9.
correctly.
Power supply missing or low. u Switch off the power train operating voltage then switch it back on.

Operating lamp flashes slowly (2 Hz) in blue.

Cause Corrective action
System booting, operating lamp u-
glows blow when booting is
completed.
CAN communication error. u Switch off the power train operating voltage then switch it back on.
No node number allocation during 1. Switch power supply off and back on again.
automatic node number 2. Send message for automatic node number allocation again.
allocation.

Operating lamp flashes rapidly (8 Hz) in blue.

Severe fault, Watchdog tripped.
Cause Corrective action
System does not boot. 1. Switch power supply off and back on again.
2. Replace PAN 9:
• Start/stop PAN at control stand (→ Page 303)
• LOP-PAN on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 319)
Hardware faulty. u Replace PAN 9:
• Start/stop PAN at control stand (→ Page 303)
• LOP-PAN on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 319)

Operating lamp flashes slowly (2 Hz) in red.

Light emitting diodes 1 to 3 are off:
Unable to assign node number state.
Cause Corrective action
Node number already assigned. u Re-assign node number (→ Page 259)
TIM-ID: 0000038884 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Troubleshooting | 239

 3.5.4 Fault indication on the service display of Local Operating Panel LOP
The main menu appears automatically after starting the service display. The Alarm page is immediately acti-
vated if alarms are pending. The active alarms appear on the service display as a running list. Pressing the
“BACK” or “NEXT” key switches over to manual alarm display mode. The alarm list can be scrolled manually
with “BACK” and “NEXT” in this case. The alarm list is constantly updated.
The Alarm page opens automatically if no key is actuated for 2 minutes when another menu option is active.
General fault messages and fault codes are shown on the Alarm page. Fault descriptions are provided in the
relevant application descriptions.

Systembus Processing Unit SPU – Alarm page

Item Meaning
A Alarm 1
B Alarm 2 ... n
1 Display “START OF ALARM - LIST”
2 SysID number with associated value
3 Alarm description
TIM-ID: 0000038883 - 002

4 Alarm separator with “--” sign

5 Display of other alarms

Table 57: SPU Alarm page

240 | Troubleshooting | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Representation of the SPU SysID

Item Meaning
1 Index 1 with separator for legibility
2 Index 2
3 Index 3
4 p: Alarm priority 0 to 7
q: Acknowledgment state 0 or 1
5 Object flags 0 to 3
6 Node numbers 0 to 255
7 Group

Table 58: Representation of the SPU SysID

TIM-ID: 0000038883 - 002

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Troubleshooting | 241

 3.5.5 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

3.5.5.1 Single-point alarm acknowledgment on display MFD

Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ An alarm has been signaled.

Acknowledging single-point alarms using the alarm window

1. Activate “Alarm window opens automatically” setting if required .
2. Press “Horn” button.
Result: Horn is silenced.
3. Rectify cause of alarm, contact Service if required.
4. Mark unacknowledged alarm.
Result: Alarm is shown in black on a cyan background.
5. Press “Alarm acknowledge” button in alarm window.
Result: Alarm is shown in black on gray background following acknowledgment.

Acknowledging single-point alarms on the Alarm page

1. Press “Horn” button.
Result: Horn is silenced.
2. If the alarm page is not open, press “Alarm page” button.
Result: “Alarm Page” opens.
3. Rectify cause of alarm, contact Service if required.
4. Mark unacknowledged alarm.
Result: Alarm is shown in black on a cyan background.
5. Press “Alarm acknowledgment” button.
Result: Alarm is shown in black on gray background.

TIM-ID: 0000038882 - 001

242 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3.5.5.2 Troubleshooting portable control unit ROS 8

The following troubleshooting table shall help to identify the causes of the faults where the fault in question
is not directly identified by the display and alarm systems.
The list does not cover causes of faults in the higher-level remote control system.
Applicable to all troubleshooting activities:
• Various sub-sections of the system are protected by fuses. Check that none of these fuses have been
tripped before taking further action.
• The entire system is equipped with self-restoring fuses. Always switch the system off, wait five minutes
and then switch back on first before continuing troubleshooting.
The portable control unit ROS 8 is watertight and must not be opened.

The LEDs on the portable control unit remain dark after switching the overall
system on.
Cause Corrective action
Connector not properly connected 1. Insert connector properly and tighten union nut.
to socket or contacts oxidized. 2. Remove and insert connector several times to clean its contacts.
3. Clean connector contacts with isopropyl alcohol.
Cable between portable control u Replace cable.
unit and socket is faulty.
Socket is faulty. 1. Use portable control unit at different point of connection.
2. Replace socket.
Operating voltage of RIM 2 1. Check fuse for the RIM 2 supply voltage in the higher-level system
interface missing. and replace as required.
2. Check cabling from RIM 2 to higher-level remote control system.
Connector not properly inserted in u Connect connector concerned properly and secure with locking
RIM 2 interface. screws:
• X3 for socket 1
• X4 for socket 2
• X5 for socket 3
• X6 for socket 4
Cabling between socket and u Check cabling.
RIM 2 interface is faulty.
Portable control unit is faulty. u Replace portable control unit.
RIM 2 interface is faulty. u Replace RIM 2 interface.
TIM-ID: 0000040039 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 243

 Portable control unit without function when being connected to a specific
socket only.
Cause Corrective action
Connector not properly connected 1. Insert connector properly and tighten union nut.
to socket or contacts oxidized. 2. Remove and insert connector several times to clean its contacts.
3. Clean connector contacts with isopropyl alcohol.
Socket is faulty. 1. Use portable control unit at different point of connection.
2. Replace socket.
Connector not properly inserted in u Connect connector concerned properly and secure with locking
RIM 2 interface. screws:
• X3 for socket 1
• X4 for socket 2
• X5 for socket 3
• X6 for socket 4
Cabling between socket and u Check cabling.
RIM 2 interface is faulty.

The COMMAND LED flashes on the portable control unit but initial command
cannot be assumed.
Cause Corrective action
Deadman's control has tripped. u Insert plug of wrist strap properly in holder on ROS 8 portable
control unit.
Portable control unit is faulty. u Replace portable control unit.
RIM 2 interface is faulty. u Replace RIM 2 interface.

Command transfer from a stationary control stand to the portable control unit
fails.
Cause Corrective action
Deadman's control has tripped. u Insert plug of wrist strap properly in holder on ROS 8 portable
control unit.
Portable control unit is faulty. u Replace portable control unit.
RIM 2 interface is faulty. u Replace RIM 2 interface.

Portable control unit is no longer in command although no stationary control

stand has requested command.
Cause Corrective action
READY FOR START has been u Deactivate READY FOR START.
TIM-ID: 0000040039 - 001

activated.
Deadman's control has tripped. u Insert plug of wrist strap properly in holder on ROS 8 portable
control unit.
Portable control unit is faulty. u Replace portable control unit.
RIM 2 interface is faulty. u Replace RIM 2 interface.

244 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 The portable control unit is in command; clutch and speed control can be
carried out with one thumbwheel only.
Cause Corrective action
The other power train is out of u Put power train into operation.
operation.
The other power train is in t u Deactivate READY FOR START.
READY FOR START mode.
Portable control unit is faulty. u Replace portable control unit.
RIM 2 interface is faulty. u Replace RIM 2 interface.

The portable control unit is in command; clutch and speed control can be
carried out with none of the thumbwheels.
Cause Corrective action
Both power trains are out of u Put power trains into operation.
operation.
Both power trains are in READY u Deactivate READY FOR START.
FOR START mode.
Portable control unit is faulty. u Replace portable control unit.
RIM 2 interface is faulty. u Replace RIM 2 interface.

The portable control unit is in command; Trolling mode activation fails.

Cause Corrective action
Portable control unit is faulty. u Replace portable control unit.
Trolling unit is faulty. u (→ Manufacturer's documentation)

Anchor windlass cannot be operated.

Cause Corrective action
Cause depending on the specific u (→ Contact Service)
vessel/order.

Bow thruster cannot be operated.

Cause Corrective action
Cause depending on the specific u (→ Contact Service)
vessel/order.

Stern thruster cannot be operated.

TIM-ID: 0000040039 - 001

Cause Corrective action

Cause depending on the specific u (→ Contact Service)
vessel/order.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 245

 3.5.5.3 Emergency Panel – Troubleshooting

The following troubleshooting table shall help to identify the causes of the faults where the fault in question
is not directly identified by the display and alarm systems.
The list does not cover causes of faults in the higher-level remote control system.
Applicable to all troubleshooting activities:
• Various sub-sections of the system are protected by fuses. Check that none of these fuses have been
tripped before taking further action.
• The fully integrated system is equipped with self-restoring fuses. Always switch the system off, wait
approx. five minutes and then switch back on first before continuing troubleshooting.
The Emergency Panel features a waterproof design and must not be opened.

AL Backup RCS active (yellow alarm)

Cause Corrective action
Activating the Emergency Panel u None (Emergency Panel is active)
has tripped an active yellow alarm
(visual and audible).

AL Clutch Interlock Override (red alarm)

Cause Corrective action
Emergency Panel active. u None (engagement/disengagement outside window.)
INTERLOCK active or the plant is
not operating in the engagement/
disengagement window.
Engaging from NEUTRAL to
ASTERN or from NEUTRAL to
AHEAD;
LOCAL inactive

AL Backup RCS defect (red alarm)

Cause Corrective action
Emergency Panel status u Replace Emergency Panel
monitoring signaling a problem
(internal fault)
Short circuit when gear setting u Check cabling (W201)
AHEAD is active and/or gear
setting ASTERN is active.
Emergency Panel is inactive.

WB Backup RCS (red alarm)

TIM-ID: 0000068090 - 001

Cause Corrective action

Disruption of gear setting signals u Check cabling (W201)
or status monitoring of the
Emergency Panel

246 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4 Workshop Manual
4.1 Operating Tests
4.1.1 Overspeed test
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: READY FOR OPERATION LED on PAN of Local Operating Panel
LOP 13 lit green.

Performing overspeed test at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

1. Start up the engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 216).
2. Press OVERSPEED TEST pushbutton.
Result: • OVERSPEED TEST LED lights up red.
• The engine is shut down by the emergency shutdown function when the Overspeed test is successful:
– Emergency-air shutoff flaps close, if applicable.
TIM-ID: 0000038668 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Workshop Manual | 247

 4.1.2 Emergency stop test
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton accessible on the PAN of Local Operating Panel LOP 13.
☑ Engine shut down.

Emergency stop test at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 or on control panel

start/stop PAN on control stand
1. Start engine.
2. Run engine up to idling speed.
3. Push locking device on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 or on control stand into upper lock-in position.
4. Press EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton.
Result: • EMERGENCY STOP LED lit red.
• Alarm horn sounds.
• COMBINED ALARM / HORN OFF LED flashes.
• Engine is shut down by the emergency shutdown feature:
– On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Flaps close.
– Engine is shut down by stopping fuel injection.
• Alarm is signaled on the control stand (or control stands if there are several) analogous to an emergency
stop from the control stand (→ Page 147) .
5. Push locking device on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 or on control stand into lower lock-in position.
6. Press COMBINED ALARM / HORN OFF pushbutton.
Result: • The alarm horn is silenced.
• COMBINED ALARM / HORN OFF LED goes out.
7. Alarm acknowledgment on control stand:
• on display Basic DIS (→ Page 93)
• on display MFD (→ Page 242)
Result: COMBINED ALARM / HORN OFF LED lights up.
8. On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Open flaps manually.
Result: Engine is ready for starting.

TIM-ID: 0000039087 - 004

248 | Operating Tests | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.1.3 Engine – Cranking
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Engine start is disabled.
☑ Local Operating Panel LOP 13 accessible.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION lit.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Before cranking the engine with starter system, make sure that there are no persons in the engine's
danger zone.

Cranking engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

1. Press and hold down the STOP key.
Result: STOP LED lights up white.
2. Press and hold down START pushbutton.
Result: The engine turns on the starter for max. 20 seconds.
3. Release START pushbutton.
Result: STOP LED lights up white.
4. Release START pushbutton.
TIM-ID: 0000039088 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Operating Tests | 249

 4.1.4 Lamp test
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Engine at standstill.

Lamp testing control panel Start/Stop PAN on control stand

Note: The lamp test is performed on all power trains if more than one are switched on (all shafts).
1. Press and hold down the CONTROL ACTIVE/LAMP TEST key.
Result: • All LEDs on the PAN control panels on the control stands light up white.
• All LEDs on the ROS command units on the control stands light up.
2. Release the CONTROL ACTIVE/LAMP TEST key.

Lamp testing emergency panel

Note: • The emergency panel assumes command in operating mode “Active”. All user inputs at the emergency
panel are switched through to the LOP, the engine management system and the gearbox.
• The lamp test is performed once following activation of the emergency panel and takes 3 seconds.
u Press ON/OFF key.
Result: • Emergency panel is in operating mode “Active”.
• The light emitting diodes (GEAR, RPM, ON/OFF) on the emergency panel light up white.
• The keys (GEAR, RPM, ON/OFF) light up red.
• The LOCAL and INTERLOCK lettering and symbols light up yellow.
• The Emergency Panel lettering lights up red.
• Horn sounds.

TIM-ID: 0000045304 - 002

250 | Operating Tests | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.1.5 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

4.1.5.1 Test overspeed

Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION on Local Op-
erating Panel LOP 14 lit green.
☑ Power train is switched to local mode.
☑ Engine speed display at Local Operating Panel LOP is selected.

Performing overspeed test on Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1. Start up the engine on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (→ Page 223).
2. Press and hold down TEST OVERSPEED pushbutton.
Result: • The TEST OVERSPEED illuminated pushbutton lights up red.
• The overspeed limit (bargraph display at LOP) is reduced.
3. Increase engine speed by pressing the "ENGINE SPEED INCREASE" button.
Result: • The engine shuts down via the emergency shutdown function when the reduced overspeed limit is
reached.
• Emergency-air shutoff flaps close, if applicable.
TIM-ID: 0000039825 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 251

 4.1.5.2 Emergency stop test
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ EMERGENCY STOP illuminated pushbutton on Local Operating Panel 14 is accessible.
☑ Engine shut down.

Emergency stop test on Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1. Start engine.
2. Run engine up to idling speed.
3. Lift the protective flap covering the illuminated pushbutton EMERGENCY STOP.
4. Press illuminated pushbutton EMERGENCY STOP.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton EMERGENCY STOP is lit red.
• Engine is shut down by the emergency shutdown feature:
– On engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps: Flaps close.
– Engine is shut down by stopping fuel injection.
• Alarm is signaled on the control stand (or control stands if there are several) analogous to an emergency
stop from the control stand (→ Page 147) .
5. Close the protective flap.
6. Acknowledge alarm at Local Operating Panel LOP 14.
7. Open flaps manually on engines with emergency air-shutoff flaps.
Result: Engine is ready for starting.

TIM-ID: 0000039826 - 004

252 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.1.5.3 Engine – Turning
Preconditions
☑ Overall system of the power train is switched on.
☑ Power train is switched to local mode.
☑ Local Operating Panel LOP 14 accessible.
☑ Power train is switched ready for operation: Illuminated pushbutton READY FOR OPERATION lit.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Before cranking the engine with starter system, make sure that there are no persons in the engine's
danger zone.

Turn engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1. Press and hold down TURNEN pushbutton.
Result: The engine turns on the starter for max. 20 seconds.
2. Release TURNEN pushbutton.
TIM-ID: 0000039827 - 006

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 253

 4.2 Checks and Settings
4.2.1 Engine wiring – Check
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage on master switch (fuse) is switched off.

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Isopropyl alcohol

Engine wiring – Check

1. Check securing screws of cable clamps on the engine and tighten loose screw connections.
2. Make certain that cables are securely seated in clamps and cannot move freely.
3. Check that cable ties are secure, tighten loose ties.
4. Replace faulty cable ties.
5. Visually inspect the following electrical line components for damage:
• Connector housings
• Contacts
• Sockets
• Cable and connection terminals
• Terminal contacts.
6. (→ Contact Service) if cable conductors are damaged.
7. Clean dirty connector housings, sockets and contacts with isopropyl alcohol.
8. Ensure that all connecting plugs of the sensors are correctly engaged.

TIM-ID: 0000040169 - 001

254 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.2 Checking LOP control panel settings
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and secured against being restarted.
☑ Power supply switched off.
☑ Front panel of LOP control panel open.

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Preparations
1. Switch on power supply.
2. Follow the booting sequence on the display. The alarm page is shown automatically on the service display (1)
after completion of the booting sequence. If active alarms are pending, the alarm page will be activated im-
mediately.

Checking network device num-

ber of SPU MCS module on the
service display
1. Press ESC button (2).
Result: Menu is shown on service display (1).
2. Press BACK (3) or NEXT (4) button repeatedly
until menu shows INFO PAGE.
3. Press ENTER button (5).
Result: • INFO PAGE opens.
• The network device number of the SPU
MCS module is displayed.
4. Press ESC button (2).
Result: Menu is shown on service display (1).

Checking the SPU MCS module IP address

1. Press BACK (3) or NEXT (4) button repeatedly until menu shows MCS IP ADRESS.
2. Press ENTER button (5).
Result: • MCS IP ADRESS opens.
• IP address of MCS module is displayed.
TIM-ID: 0000039091 - 004

Note: The last digit of the IP address represents the network device number of the corresponding module, e.g.:
• 10.0.240.1 => network device 1
• 10.0.240.2 => network device 2
3. Press ESC button (2).
Result: Menu is shown on service display (1).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 255

 Checking the SPU RCS module IP address
1. Press BACK (3) or NEXT (4) button repeatedly until menu shows RCS IP ADRESS.
2. Press ENTER button (5).
Result: • RCS IP ADRESS opens.
• IP address of RCS module is displayed.
Note: The last digit of the IP address represents the network device number of the corresponding module, e.g.:
• 10.0.240.1 => network device 1
• 10.0.240.2 => network device 2
3. Press ESC button (2).
Result: Menu is shown on service display (1).

TIM-ID: 0000039091 - 004

256 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.3 LOP display DIS – Setting
Preconditions
☑ Operating voltage available.
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.

Note: Downloading commences automatically if the settings described below have been made accordingly on the
“Service page”. The display restarts twice in this case.

Preparation
1. Switch on operating voltage.
2. Follow the booting sequence on the display. Switch over to the “Overview page” within 10s of booting se-
quence completion by pressing key F5 and select the graphic “Service page” there by pressing keys F3 or F4
(“↑”or “↓”).
3. Press F5 key (Enter).
Result: The Service page is opened in Edit mode.

Setting BDM server

1. Press F2 key (Enter) repeatedly until the “BDM Function” input field is activated.
2. Activate the function with keys F3 or F4.
3. Press F2 key (Enter) to confirm the input.
Result: The function is active and the display reboots automatically.

Setting node number

1. Consult the configuration overview to determine which node number the display DIS concerned must have:
• Configuration of BlueVision_Basic | NG (→ Page 352)
2. Repeat preparation steps 2 and 3.
3. Press F2 key (Enter) repeatedly until the “CAN node number” input field is activated.
4. Set the node number by pressing the F3 or F4 keys (“↑” or “↓”).
5. Press F2 key (Enter) to confirm the input.
Result: The new node number is displayed.

Setting baud rate

1. Determine the baud rate:
• Configuration of BlueVision_Basic | NG (→ Page 352)
2. Repeat preparation steps 2 and 3.
3. Press F2 key (Enter) repeatedly until the “CAN Baud Rate” input field is activated.
4. Set the baud rate by pressing the F3 or F4 keys (“↑” or “↓”).
5. Press F2 key (Enter) to confirm the input.
Result: The new baud rate is displayed.

System and user settings

TIM-ID: 0000043776 - 002

u Repeat preparation steps 2 and 3.

Result: The following settings can be made on the relevant pages:
Service page:
• Date and time
• Unit switching
• Reset trip consumption display
System page:
• Language switching.
Note: Preparation steps 2 and 3 need not be repeated in this case.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 257

 4.2.4 Control panel PAN 9 settings – Check
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off.

Removing PAN 9 locking device if fitted

u (→ Page 294)

Removing PAN 9 cover cap

u (→ Page 296)

Removing PAN 9 front panel

u (→ Page 297)

Checking the settings (PAN type, baud rate, node number)

1. Switch on operating voltage.
Note: The stored PAN settings can be retrieved by
means of the Mode pushbutton. The settings
are displayed one after the other by repeat-
edly pressing the Mode pushbutton.
2. Press the Mode pushbutton (5).
Result: PAN type is shown as a figure on the display
(3). Associated LED (8) lights up.
3. Display (3) shows current PAN type as a fig-
ure on the display (3). Check PAN type.
4. Press the Mode pushbutton (5).
Result: Node number shown on display (3). Associat-
ed LED (7) lights up.
Note: The PAN 9 is factory-configured at MTU as
the start/stop PAN with predefined node
number.
5. Check flashing pattern or continuous illumi-
nation of LEDs 1, 2 and 3 (from top to bot-
tom).
6. Press the Mode pushbutton (5).
Result: The baud rate is shown as a figure on the dis-
play (3). Associated LED (6) lights up.
Note: The PAN 9 is supplied with the baud rate fac-
tory-set at MTU to 250 Kbaud.
7. Read off baud rate:
• 01: 125 Kbaud
TIM-ID: 0000043777 - 001

• 02: 250 Kbaud

8. Press the Mode pushbutton (5).
Result: Menu closes.
9. If necessary, adjust control panel PAN 9
(→ Page 259) settings.

258 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.5 Control panel PAN 9 – Setting
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage is switched on.

Removing PAN 9 locking device if fitted

u (→ Page 294)

Removing PAN 9 cover cap

u (→ Page 296)

Removing PAN 9 front panel

u (→ Page 297)

Setting node number

1. Press MODE pushbutton (5) repeatedly until
LED (7) lights up.
Result: • PAN 9 is in “Node number setting” mode.
• LEDs (9 and 10) flash.
• Display (3) shows current node number as
a hexadecimal figure.
2. Set node number using the UP pushbutton
(1) or DOWN pushbutton (2).
• Press and release: setting changes in sin-
gle increments.
• Press and hold down: setting keeps chang-
ing until pushbutton released.
Result: The set node number is shown as a hexadeci-
mal figure on the display (3).
3. Press MODE pushbutton (5) repeatedly until
LED (4) changes color from white to blue.
Result: Set node number has been stored, setting
mode has been ended.

Setting PAN type

1. Press MODE pushbutton (4) repeatedly until LED (8) lights up.
Result: • PAN 9 is in 'Setting PAN type' mode.
• LEDs (9, 10) flash.
• Display (3) shows current PAN type as a figure on the display (3).
2. Set PAN type using the UP pushbutton (1) or DOWN pushbutton (2):
• The following PAN types can be set:
TIM-ID: 0000043778 - 001

01: Start/Stop PAN

02: LOP PAN (LOP 13)
• Press and release: setting changes in single increments.
• Press and hold down: setting keeps changing until pushbutton released.
Result: Set PAN type is shown on the display (3).
3. Press MODE pushbutton (5) repeatedly until LED (4) changes color from white to blue.
Result: Set baud rate has been stored, setting mode has been ended.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 259

 Setting baud rate
1. Press MODE pushbutton (5) repeatedly until LED (6) lights up.
Result: • PAN 9 is in 'Setting Baud Rate' mode.
• LEDs (6, 7) flash.
• Display (3) shows current baud rate as a figure.
2. Set baud rate using the UP pushbutton (1) or DOWN pushbutton (2):
• Press and release: setting changes in single increments.
• Press and hold down: setting keeps changing until pushbutton released.
Result: Set baud rate is shown on the display (3):
• 01= 125 Kbaud
• 02= 250 Kbaud
3. Press MODE pushbutton (5) repeatedly until LED (4) changes color from white to blue.
Result: Set baud rate has been stored, setting mode has been ended.

Installing PAN 9 front panel

u (→ Page 297)

Installing PAN 9 cover cap

u (→ Page 296)

Installing PAN 9 locking device, if applicable

u (→ Page 294)

TIM-ID: 0000043778 - 001

260 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.6 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Configuration check
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.

Opening yard slot

u Unscrew screws (1) and remove yard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
TIM-ID: 0000039094 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 261

 Checking configuration
1. Check setting of rotary hex encoding
switches (1, 3).

2. Check setting of slide switches (2).

Item Findings Action
Rotary hex encoding switch Incorrect node number set. Set correct node number
MSB (1) (→ Page 263).
Rotary hex encoding switch
LSB (3)
Slide switches S1 to S12 (2) Setting deviates from system con- Set slide switches in accordance
figuration. with system configuration
(→ Page 263).

Table 59: LOP configuration – Diagnosis and remedial action

Closing yard slot

1. Install yard slot cover (3) on SPU front pan-
el (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).

TIM-ID: 0000039094 - 003

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

262 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.7 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Setting configuration
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.

Opening shipyard slot

u Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
TIM-ID: 0000039095 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 263

 Setting configuration
Note: The node number of the RCS module is set
internally (node number of the RCS module =
node number of the MCS module + 1). Con-
sult the configuration overview to determine
which node number the LOP concerned must
have (→ Page 352).
1. Set node number of MCS module:
Note: Setting is 0 when the hex rotary encoding
switch is horizontal.
a) Move rotary hex encoding switch
MSB (1) to the correct position using a
small screwdriver (see example).
b) Move rotary hex encoding switch LSB (3)
to the correct position using a small
screwdriver (see example).

Node number Node number MSB LSB

Decimal Hexadecimal
01 0x01 0 1

Table 60: Example for node number setting of an SPU for engine 1
Note: The set node number and the position of the slide switches must be noted with a water-resistant pen on the
identification plate in the shipyard slot cover.
2. Set slide switches (2) in accordance with the table below:
• Function assignment (e.g. Enginewise-FB Cfg1) and switch setting depends on the software configuration
(Automation Suite / Configurator).
Switch Shipyard slot des- Meaning Position Function
ignation
S1 Enginewise-FB Configuration, gear feed- Up Gearbox has no en-
Cfg1 back ENGINEWISE ginewise feedback,
feedback is generat-
ed internally in the
LOP.
Down Enginewise feed-
back comes directly
from the gearbox.
S2 and S3 are always switched in combination:
S2 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE HIGHSIDE Up Enginewise feed-
Cfg2 switch lock back switches to
S3 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE LOWSIDE Down +24V (High Side
Cfg3 switch lock Switch).
TIM-ID: 0000039095 - 005

S2 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE HIGHSIDE Down Enginewise feed-

Cfg2 switch lock back switches to
S3 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE LOWSIDE Up GND (Low Side
Cfg3 switch lock Switch.)

264 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Switch Shipyard slot des- Meaning Position Function
ignation
S4 Neutral-FB Cfg1 Configuration Gearfeed- Up Gearbox has no
back NEUTRAL NEUTRAL feedback,
feedback is formed
internally in the
LOP.
Down NEUTRAL feedback
comes directly from
the gearbox.
S5 and S6 are always switched in combination:
S5 Neutral-FB Cfg2 Lock HIGHSIDE switch Up NEUTRAL feedback
NEUTRAL switches to +24V
S6 Neutral-FB Cfg3 Lock LOWSIDE switch Down (High Side Switch).
NEUTRAL
S5 Neutral-FB Cfg2 Lock HIGHSIDE switch Down NEUTRAL feedback
NEUTRAL switches to GND
S6 Neutral-FB Cfg3 Lock LOWSIDE switch Up (Low Side Switch.).
NEUTRAL
S7 CountEngwise FB Configuration, gear feed- Up Gearbox has no
Cfg1 back COUNTER-ENGINE- counter-enginewise
WISE feedback, feedback
is generated inter-
nally in the LOP.
Down Counter-enginewise
feedback comes di-
rectly from the
gearbox.
S8 and S9 are always switched in combination:
S8 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Up Counter-enginewise
Cfg2 HIGHSIDE switch lock feedback switches
S9 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Down to +24V (High Side
Cfg3 LOWSIDE switch lock Switch).

S8 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Down Counter-enginewise

Cfg2 HIGHSIDE switch lock feedback switches
S9 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Up to GND (Low Side
Cfg3 LOWSIDE switch lock Switch).

S10 is only relevant if an MTU-RCS is configured (jumper plug X33.2 connected) and an emergency panel is
connected at X7:
S10 Neutral-Cfg E-Pan- Control for gearbox “N” Up Neutral is always
el when the emergency pan- active.
TIM-ID: 0000039095 - 005

el is used for control Down Neutral is generated

automatically (neu-
tral is always active
if enginewise or
counter-enginewise
is not active).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 265

 Switch Shipyard slot des- Meaning Position Function
ignation
S11 Key switch Master Main key switch Up Master key switch
not present:
System is activated
automatically when
the supply voltage
is applied.
Down Master key switch
present:
Plant can be switch-
ed on with external
key switch.
S12 Key switch RCS RCS key switch Up RCS key switch not
present:
Plant (RCS section)
is activated auto-
matically when the
supply voltage is ap-
plied or with the
master key
switches.
Down RCS key switch
present:
The RCS key switch
switches the RCS
control stand com-
ponents in the SPU
(CAN) and the RCS
IO extension ON
and OFF.
The position of slide switches S1, S4, S7 affects output to the shipyard interface (the function depends on
the software configuration):
• S1: -X36 Pin 7, 9, 11
• S4: -X36 Pin 1, 3, 5
• S7: -X36 Pin 2, 4, 6

Table 61: Slide switch settings

Closing shipyard slot

1. Check that the settings have been noted on
the identification plate in the shipyard slot
cover.
2. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front
panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039095 - 005

266 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

Loading software
Note: Check that the correct SD card is inserted for the LOP concerned.
u Switch on operating voltage.
Result: • Loading starts automatically.
• The main menu appears automatically on the service display when loading has been completed. The Alarm
page is immediately activated if alarms are pending.
TIM-ID: 0000039095 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 267

 4.2.8 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Jumper configuration check
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.

Opening shipyard slot

u Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
TIM-ID: 0000039096 - 004

268 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Checking jumper configuration
1. Locate slot for jumper plugs X33.1 (1) and
X33.2 (2).
2. Check jumper plug slot in accordance with
following tables:
a) MTU-RCS used (→ Table 62)
b) Non-MTU RCS used (→ Table 63)

Item Findings Action

Slot X33.1 (1) Jumper plug is connected. Insert jumper plug at X33.2.
Slot X33.2 (2) Jumper plug missing. Insert jumper plug.
Slot X33.2 (2) Jumper plug is connected. OK

Table 62: Jumpers if MTU RCS used

Item Findings Action
Slot X33.1 (1) Jumper plug missing. Insert jumper plug.
Slot X33.2 (2) Jumper plug is connected. Insert jumper plug at X33.1.
Slot X33.1 (1) Jumper plug is connected. OK

Table 63: Jumpers if non-MTU RCS is used

Closing shipyard slot

1. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front
panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039096 - 004

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Checks and Settings | 269

 Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13
u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

TIM-ID: 0000039096 - 004

270 | Checks and Settings | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.9 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

4.2.9.1 MFD display settings – Check

Preconditions
☑ Operating voltage applied.
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.

Preparation
1. Switch on operating voltage.
2. During system start simultaneously press and hold the function keys 1 and 2 (from above).
Result: The device configuration menu appears.

Checking node number settings

1. Consult the system configuration (→ Page 352) to determine the node numbers which the display concerned
must have.
2. Press function key 3 or 4 (← or →) repeatedly until “P-Bus Node: ” input field is activated.
Result: The set node number is displayed. Proceed as follows to correct an incorrect setting:
Item Findings Action
MFD display – “Device configura- Incorrect node number set. Set correct node number
tion page” (→ Page 272).

Table 64: Checking node number settings

3. Same procedure for “F-Bus Node” -> Node number for F bus = 12 (→ Page 352).

Checking baud rate setting

1. Determine the baud rate (→ Page 352).
2. Press function key 3 or 4 (← or →) repeatedly until “Baud rate: ” input field is activated.
Result: The set baud rate is displayed. Proceed as follows to correct an incorrect setting:
Item Findings Action
MFD display – “Device configura- Incorrect baud rate set. Set correct baud rate
tion page” “250 Kbaud” (→ Page 272).

Table 65: Checking baud rate setting

Checking BDM server settings

1. Determine BDM server setting.
2. Press function key 3 or 4 (← or →) repeatedly until “BDM server: ” input field is activated.
Result: The set BDM server number is displayed. Proceed as follows to correct an incorrect setting:
TIM-ID: 0000039089 - 003

Item Findings Action

MFD display – “Device configura- Incorrect BDM server set. Set correct BDM server “2”
tion page” (→ Page 272).

Table 66: Checking BDM server settings

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 271

 4.2.9.2 MFD display – Setting
Preconditions
☑ Operating voltage available.
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.

Preparation
1. Switch on operating voltage.
2. During system start simultaneously press and hold the function keys 1 and 2 (from above).
Result: The device configuration menu appears.

Setting node number

1. Consult the configuration overview to determine which node number (process bus and field bus) the display
concerned must have:
• Configuration of BlueVision | NG (→ Page 352)
2.

Press function key 3 or 4 repeatedly until the “P-Bus Node” or “F-Bus Node” input field is
activated.
3.

Use function key 1 and function key 2 to set node number.

4.

To change another setting continue with function key 3 or 4

5.

If no other settings are to be changed press function key 5 to confirm entry.

Result: The device configuration menu closes and the display restarts.

TIM-ID: 0000039090 - 003

272 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Setting baud rate
1. Consult the configuration overview to determine which node number (process bus and field bus) the display
concerned must have:
• Configuration of BlueVision | NG (→ Page 352)
2. Determine the baud rate.
3.

Press function key 3 or 4 repeatedly until “Baud rate: ” input field is activated.
4.

Use function key 1 and function key 2 to set baud rate.

5.

To change another setting continue with function key 3 or 4

6.

If no other settings are to be changed press function key 5 to confirm entry.

Result: The device configuration menu closes and the display restarts.

Setting BDM server

1. Determine BDM server number.
2.

Press function key 3 or 4 repeatedly until “BDM Server: ” input field is activated.
3.

Use function key 1 and function key 2 to set BDM server number “2”.
4.

To change another setting continue with function key 3 or 4

5.

If no other settings are to be changed press function key 5 to confirm entry.

Result: The device configuration menu closes and the display restarts.
TIM-ID: 0000039090 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 273

 System and user settings
1.

Press function key 1 and function key 2 simultaneously.

2.

Use function key 1 and function key 2 to make settings on the “User settings” page, e.g.:
• Date and time
• Language switching
• Unit switching
• Reset trip consumption display
3.

If no other settings are to be changed press function key 5 to confirm entry.

4. Exit the “User settings” page with ESC.
Result: The device configuration menu closes and the display restarts.
5.

Press function key 1 and function key 2 simultaneously.

6.

Use function key 1 and function key 2 to make settings on the “System page”, e.g.:
• Alarm prefix (engine designation, e.g Stbd, Port, etc.)
• Reset fault ring buffer
7.

If no other settings are to be changed press function key 5 to confirm entry.

8. Exit the “System page” with ESC.
Result: The device configuration menu closes and the display restarts.

TIM-ID: 0000039090 - 003

274 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.9.3 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 configuration – Check
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Release the catch (1) of the LOS 4 front pan-
el (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 4 (2)
as far as it will go.

Opening shipyard slot

u Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
TIM-ID: 0000039769 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 275

 Checking configuration
1. Check setting of rotary hex encoding
switches (1, 3).

Note: Setting is 0 when the hex rotary encoding switch is horizontal.

2. Check setting of slide switches (2).
Item Findings Action
Rotary hex encoding switch Incorrect node number set. Set correct node number
MSB (1) (→ Page 277).
Rotary hex encoding switch
LSB (3)
Slide switches S1 to S12 (2) Setting deviates from system con- Set slide switches to match sys-
figuration. tem configuration (→ Page 277).

Table 67: LOP configuration – Diagnosis and remedial action

Closing shipyard slot

1. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front
panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).

TIM-ID: 0000039769 - 005

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 14

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

276 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.9.4 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 configuration – Setting
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Release the catch (1) of the LOS 4 front pan-
el (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 4 (2)
as far as it will go.

Opening shipyard slot

u Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
TIM-ID: 0000039770 - 011

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 277

 Setting configuration
Note: The node number of the RCS module is set
internally (node number of the RCS module =
node number of the MCS module + 1). Con-
sult the configuration overview to determine
which node number the LOP concerned must
have (→ Page 352).
1. Set node number of MCS module:
Note: Setting is 0 when the hex rotary encoding
switch is horizontal.
a) Move rotary hex encoding switch
MSB (1) to the correct position using a
small screwdriver (see example).
b) Move rotary hex encoding switch LSB (3)
to the correct position using a small
screwdriver (see example).

Node number Node number MSB LSB

Decimal Hexadecimal
01 0x01 0 1

Table 68: Example for node number setting of an SPU for engine 1
Note: The set node number and the position of the slide switches must be noted with a water-resistant pen on the
identification plate in the shipyard slot cover.
2. Set slide switches (2) in accordance with the table below:
• Function assignment (e.g. Enginewise-FB Cfg1) and switch setting depends on the software configuration
(Automation Suite / Configurator).
Switch Shipyard duct Meaning Position Function
designation
S1 Enginewise-FB Configuration, gear feed- Up Gearbox has no en-
Cfg1 back ENGINEWISE ginewise feedback.
LOP generates feed-
back internally.
Down Enginewise feed-
back comes directly
from the gearbox.
S2 and S3 are always switched in combination:
S2 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE HIGHSIDE Up Enginewise feed-
Cfg2 switch lock back switches to
S3 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE LOWSIDE Down +24V (High Side
Cfg3 switch lock Switch).

S2 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE HIGHSIDE Down Enginewise feed-

TIM-ID: 0000039770 - 011

Cfg2 switch lock back switches to

S3 Enginewise-FB ENGINEWISE LOWSIDE Up GND (Low Side
Cfg3 switch lock Switch.)

S4 Neutral-FB Cfg1 Configuration Gearfeed- Up Gearbox has no

back NEUTRAL neutral feedback.
LOP generates feed-
back internally.
Down NEUTRAL feedback
comes directly from
the gearbox.

278 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Switch Shipyard duct Meaning Position Function
designation
S5 and S6 are always switched in combination:
S5 Neutral-FB Cfg2 Lock HIGHSIDE switch Up NEUTRAL feedback
NEUTRAL switches to +24V
S6 Neutral-FB Cfg3 Lock LOWSIDE switch Down (High Side Switch).
NEUTRAL
S5 Neutral-FB Cfg2 Lock HIGHSIDE switch Down NEUTRAL feedback
NEUTRAL switches to GND
S6 Neutral-FB Cfg3 Lock LOWSIDE switch Up (Low Side Switch.).
NEUTRAL
S7 CountEngwise FB Configuration, gear feed- Up Gearbox has no
Cfg1 back COUNTER-ENGINE- counter-enginewise
WISE feedback. LOP gen-
erates feedback in-
ternally.
Down Counter-enginewise
feedback comes di-
rectly from the
gearbox.
S8 and S9 are always switched in combination:
S8 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Up Counter-enginewise
Cfg2 HIGHSIDE switch lock feedback switches
S9 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Down to +24V (High Side
Cfg3 LOWSIDE switch lock Switch).

S8 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Down Counter-enginewise

Cfg2 HIGHSIDE switch lock feedback switches
S9 CountEngwise-FB COUNTER-ENGINEWISE Up to GND (Low Side
Cfg3 LOWSIDE switch lock Switch).

S10 is only relevant if an MTU-RCS is configured (jumper plug X33.2 connected) and an emergency panel is
connected at X7:
S10 Neutral-Cfg E-Pan- Control for gearbox “N” Up Neutral is always
el when the emergency pan- active.
el is used for control Down Neutral is generated
automatically (neu-
tral is always active
if enginewise or
counter-enginewise
is not active).
S11 Keyswitch Master Main key switch Up Master key switch
not present:
TIM-ID: 0000039770 - 011

System is activated
automatically when
the supply voltage
is applied.
Down Master key switch
present:
Plant can be switch-
ed on with external
key switch.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 279

 Switch Shipyard duct Meaning Position Function
designation
S12 Keyswitch RCS RCS key switch Up RCS key switch not
present:
Plant (RCS section)
is activated auto-
matically when the
supply voltage is ap-
plied or with the
master key
switches.
Down RCS key switch
present:
The RCS key switch
switches the RCS
control stand com-
ponents in the SPU
(CAN) and the RCS
IO extension ON
and OFF.
The position of slide switches S1, S4, S7 affects output to the shipyard interface (the function depends on
the software configuration):
• S1: -X36 Pin 7, 9, 11
• S4: -X36 Pin 1, 3, 5
• S7: -X36 Pin 2, 4, 6

Table 69: Slide switch settings

Installing LOP software

1. Check that the correct SD card is inserted for the LOP concerned.
2. Switch on operating voltage.
Result: • Loading starts automatically.
• Main menu opens on service display.
• Alarm page opens automatically if active alarms are pending acknowledgment.

Closing shipyard slot

1. Check that the settings have been noted on
the identification plate in the shipyard slot
cover.
2. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front
panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039770 - 011

280 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 14

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.
TIM-ID: 0000039770 - 011

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 281

 4.2.9.5 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 jumper configuration – Check
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Release the catch (1) of the LOS 4 front pan-
el (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 4 (2)
as far as it will go.

Opening shipyard slot

u Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
TIM-ID: 0000039771 - 006

282 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Checking jumper configuration
1. Locate slot for jumper plugs X33.1 (1) and
X33.2 (2).
2. Check jumper plug slot in accordance with
following tables:
a) MTU-RCS used (→ Table 70)
b) Non-MTU RCS used (→ Table 71)

Item Findings Action

Slot X33.1 (1) Jumper plug is connected. Insert jumper plug at X33.2.
Slot X33.2 (2) Jumper plug missing. Insert jumper plug.
Slot X33.2 (2) Jumper plug is connected. OK

Table 70: Jumpers if MTU RCS used

Item Findings Action
Slot X33.1 (1) Jumper plug missing. Insert jumper plug.
Slot X33.2 (2) Jumper plug is connected. Insert jumper plug at X33.1.
Slot X33.1 (1) Jumper plug is connected. OK

Table 71: Jumpers if non-MTU RCS is used

Closing shipyard slot

1. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front
panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039771 - 006

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 283

 Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 14
u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

TIM-ID: 0000039771 - 006

284 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.9.6 Oil priming pump control unit PPC – Check function
Preconditions
☑ Engine is shut down and starting disabled.

Check the function of the oil priming pump control unit PPC
1. Turn selector switch on PPC (→ Page 214) to position MAN.
Result: • Indicator lamp lights up
• Oil priming pump running
2. Turn selector switch on PPC (→ Page 214) to position AUTO.
TIM-ID: 0000008430 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 285

 4.2.9.7 Assuming command at portable control unit ROS 8 – Check
Preconditions
☑ Overall system is switched on.
☑ The thumbwheels of the ROS 8 portable control unit are in NEUTRAL position.

Note: Wording is applicable to twin-shaft systems. Adopt a similar approach when dealing with single-engine
plants. Command transfer to the portable control unit can only take place in the NEUTRAL position.

Assuming command
1. Press the COMMAND key on the portable control unit.
2. Leave the thumbwheels in neutral position.
Result: • The COMMAND LEDs of the portable control unit light up.
• The portable control unit is in command.
• The engines are running at idling speed.
• The gearboxes are disengaged.

Assuming command from the portable control unit at a stationary control

stand
u (→ Page 149)

Procedure in the event of faults

u (→ Page 243)

TIM-ID: 0000040115 - 002

286 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.9.8 Palm Beach command unit ROS 17 – Settings
The braking and engaging forces of the command unit can be adjusted.
Braking force (A) and (B) (on 220 mm lever) is factory-set to FB=12 N ±3 N. This equates to a braking torque
(C) and (D) amounting to MB=2.64 Nm and an engaging torque (C) and (D) of MB=4.4 Nm.

Adjusting engaging force

Cover (A) must be removed to adjust the engaging force. Be careful to avoid tearing out the electronics ca-
bles secured to the cover.
The engaging force can then be adjusted by turning the setscrew (B). The engaging force must not exceed 30
N at the lever to avoid damaging the latch.
TIM-ID: 0000053104 - 001

Adjusting braking force

Plug screw (B) must be removed to adjust the braking force.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 287

 The braking force can then be adjusted by turning the setscrew (A). The braking force must not exceed 30 N
at the lever to avoid damaging the brake.

TIM-ID: 0000053104 - 001

288 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.2.9.9 Portable control unit ROS 8 – Checking speed control and clutch setting
Preconditions
☑ Engine(s) running at idling speed.
☑ The portable control unit is in command.

Note: • Proceed only when the vessel has sufficient clearance in open water.
• On multiple-shaft plants: Perform all steps for both shafts controlled by ROS 8.

Engaging, disengaging and changing speed

1. Turn thumbwheel on portable control unit to “Ahead” mark (latch).
Result: • The gearbox is engaged ahead.
• Thrust is exerted in the ahead direction.
2. Slowly turn thumbwheel further.
Result: The engine speed and the vessel's speed increase.
3. Turn thumbwheel on portable control unit back to “Neutral” mark (latch).
Result: • The gearbox is disengaged.
• The engine speed falls to idling speed.
• Thrust in ahead direction ceases.
4. Turn thumbwheel on portable control unit to “Astern” mark (latch).
Result: • Gearbox is engaged astern.
• Thrust is exerted in the astern direction.
5. Slowly turn thumbwheel further.
Result: The engine speed and the vessel's speed increase.
6. Turn thumbwheel on portable control unit back to “Neutral” mark (latch).
Result: • The gearbox is disengaged.
• The engine speed falls to idling speed.
• Thrust in astern direction ceases.

Procedure in case of malfunction

u (→ Page 243)
TIM-ID: 0000040116 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 289

 4.3 Repair Work
4.3.1 ROS command unit – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage on master switch (fuse) is switched off.

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Command unit ROS 13–05 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Command unit ROS 13–06 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Command unit ROS 15 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Command unit ROS 16 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Command unit ROS 17 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing command unit

Note: Figure shows command unit ROS 13 for two
shafts.
1. Undo nuts of assigned cable connectors (2,
3, 4, 5).
2. Note assignment of cables to the connec-
tions on the command unit (1) and termina-
tion resistors (2, 4) and remove cables/resis-
tors.
3. Remove nuts (6), washers (7, 8) and ground-
ing cable.
4. Unscrew nuts (10) at the threaded pins (9)
and remove with washers (11).
5. Remove command unit (1) from console re-
cess.

Installing command unit

1. Install command unit in reverse order.
2. Connect grounding cable using nut and washers.
3. Connect cables/resistors as noted.
4. Tighten cable connector nuts.
TIM-ID: 0000053090 - 003

290 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.2 Analog display instrument – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Engine coolant temperature: Instrument 0 to 120 degrees (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Gear oil temperature: Instrument 0 to 120 degrees (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Engine lube oil pressure: Instrument 0 to 10 bar (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Gear control oil pressure: Instrument 0 to 30 bar (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Engine speed: Instrument (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing instrument
1. Slacken and remove front ring (1).
2. Note assignment of cables to the connec-
tions on the instrument (2).
3. Disconnect all connectors on the back of the
instrument (2).
4. Unscrew knurled nut (4) at retainer (3).
5. Remove retainer (3).
6. Remove the instrument (2) forwards from the
installation opening (6).

Installing new instrument

1. Fit a gasket (5) on the new instrument (2).
2. Insert the new instrument (2) into the installation opening (6). Ensure that the gasket (3) is fitted cleanly all
the way round between the console surface and the protruding edge of the instrument (2).
3. Push retainer (3) onto instrument (2).
4. Screw knurled nut (4) onto retainer (3).
5. Fit front ring (1) on instrument (2).
6. Insert cables as noted.
TIM-ID: 0000039077 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 291

 4.3.3 Display Basic DIS – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped.
☑ Operating voltage on master switch (fuse) is switched off.

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Display Basic DIS (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing faulty display

1. Disconnect connector from connector sock-
et (4).
2. Use a screwdriver to carefully slacken and re-
move cover strip (1, 3) from display (2).

3. Unscrew screws (1, 3, 4, 5) on assembly

frame (2).
4. Pull the display forwards out of the console.
5. Remove the SD card from slot (6).

TIM-ID: 0000072758 - 001

Installing new display

1. Check whether gasket is attached on mating face of the new display. Fit a seal as necessary.
2. Install new display in reverse order.
3. Connect connecting cable to connector socket.
4. Insert SD card.

292 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.4 SD card on display Basic DIS – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Operating voltage on master switch (fuse) is switched off.

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Screwdriver for internal hexagon X00E50211392 1
SD card (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

NOTICE
Installation and/or removal of the SD card.
Risk of damage to the SD card and the electronic assembly!
• Switch off power supply before installing or removing the SD card.

Removing SD card
1. Release screws (3).
2. Remove cover (2).
3. Gently press on the SD card (1).
Result: The memory card lock disengages (press/
press lock/unlock).
4. Remove the SD card (1) from the slot.

Installing SD memory card

1. Insert new SD card (1) into slot.
2. Gently press on the SD card (1).
TIM-ID: 0000072759 - 001

Result: The memory card lock engages (press/press lock/unlock).

3. Install cover (2) with screws (3).
4. Use torque wrench to tighten screws (3) to specified tightening torque.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw 8 to Tightening torque 0.508 ± 0.056 Nm
32 x 3/8"

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 293

 4.3.5 Control panel locking device – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Locking device (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing locking device

1. Insert screwdriver from above (A, B) behind
both guide lugs (3, 4) on one side of the lock-
ing device (2) and carefully lever the locking
device (2) from the guide groove in the con-
trol unit (1).
2. Remove the locking device (2) upwards.

Installing locking device

1. Place locking device (2) on control panel with
marking (3) facing MTU logo.
2. On one side of the control unit (1), insert side
guide lugs of the locking device (2) into the
side guide grooves of the control unit (1) be-
tween the engagement points (4).
TIM-ID: 0000038982 - 005

294 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3. Gently lever the guide lugs (A and B) on the
other side of the locking device (2) using a
screwdriver and apply light pressure to en-
gage downwards into the guide groove of the
control unit (1).
4. After assembly, ensure that the locking de-
vice (2) can be moved and that the EMER-
GENCY STOP and OVERRIDE pushbuttons
can be exposed.
TIM-ID: 0000038982 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 295

 4.3.6 Control panel cover cap – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Cover cap (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing cover cap

1. Position the screwdriver at the engagement
points (5) on both sides of the cover cap (2),
unlock the cover cap (2), and push it away
from the control unit (1) and front panel (3) in
direction (A).
2. The second cover cap (4) is removed in the
same way as the first cover cap (2).

Installing cover cap

1. Position the cover cap (2) at the control
unit (1), push onto control unit (1) and front
panel (3) in direction (A), and engage.
2. The second cover cap (4) is installed in the
same way as the first cover cap (2). TIM-ID: 0000038983 - 004

296 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.7 Control panel front panel – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Front panel (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing locking device (if fitted)

u (→ Page 294)

Removing cover caps

u (→ Page 296)

Removing front panel

1. Remove screws (2, 6).
2. Push screwdrivers one after the other into
four positions (A, B, C, D) between control
panel (1) and front panel (5) and carefully
prise open front panel (5) until the catch-
es (3, 7, 8, 10) are released.
Result: The front panel (5) is now only attached to
the control panel by means of the catches (4,
9).
3. Reach under the front panel (5) with your in-
dex finger at position (A) or (B) and carefully
prise off the front panel (5). Hold the front
panel (5) with your other hand while doing so.
If necessary, repeat the procedure at position
(C) or (D).
4. Remove front panel (5).

Installing front panel

1. Put the front panel (3) on the control unit (1),
ensuring it is the right way round (buttons on
the right).
2. Press down evenly on the front panel (3) and
snap into position at the three catch loca-
tions (A, B, C) on each side of the control
TIM-ID: 0000038984 - 005

unit (1).
3. Refit screws (2, 4).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 297

 Refitting cover caps
u (→ Page 296)

Refitting locking device (if fitted)

u (→ Page 294)

TIM-ID: 0000038984 - 005

298 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.8 Labeling kit for control panel – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage is switched off at master switch (circuit breaker).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Labeling kit (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Remove locking device (if fitted)

u (→ Page 294)

Remove cover caps

u (→ Page 296)

Remove front panel

u (→ Page 297)

Removing labeling kit

1. Position screwdriver at the notches (A, B, C)
in the labeling kit (2) one after the other and
carefully lift labeling kit (2) out of the front
panel (1).
2. The second labeling kit (3) is removed in the
same way as the first labeling kit (2).
TIM-ID: 0000038985 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 299

 Installing labeling kit
Note: Insert labeling kit (2) correctly. The three
notches (3) face outwards, the single
notch (4) faces inwards towards the pushbut-
tons. Ensure correct arrangement of the la-
beling kits (→ Page 90) and (→ Page 188).
1. Insert new labeling kit (2) into front panel (1)
and press on evenly until the labeling kit (2)
engages.
2. The second labeling kit (3) is installed in the
same way as the first labeling kit (2).

Install front panel

u (→ Page 297)

Install cover caps

u (→ Page 296)

Install locking device (if fitted)

u (→ Page 294)

TIM-ID: 0000038985 - 003

300 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.9 Pushbutton for control panel – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage on master switch (fuse) is switched off.

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Pushbutton (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
Locking pushbutton (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Remove locking device (if fitted)

u (→ Page 294)

Remove cover caps

u (→ Page 296)

Remove front panel

u (→ Page 297)

Removing pushbutton from con-

trol panel
Note: Note the pushbutton or locking pushbutton
assignment when removing.
1. Position screwdriver at the guide lugs (A, B)
between front panel (1) and pushbutton (2)
and carefully loosen pushbutton (2) from
front panel (1).
2. Remove pushbutton (2) from front panel (1).
TIM-ID: 0000038986 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 301

 Installing pushbutton in control
panel
Note: Observe the noted pushbutton or locking
pushbutton assignment when installing.
u Insert guide lugs (2) of the pushbutton (1) in-
to slot (A, B) on the front panel (3) and en-
gage pushbutton (1).

Install front panel

u (→ Page 297)

Install cover caps

u (→ Page 296)

Install locking device (if fitted)

u (→ Page 294)

TIM-ID: 0000038986 - 003

302 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.10 Control panel PAN 9 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Control panel PAN 9 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing control panel PAN 9

1. Remove connector from socket X1 on PAN 9.
2. Unscrew knurled nut (4) from stud (2).
3. Remove fastening element (3) from control
unit (1).
4. Remove control unit (1) upwards.

Installing control panel PAN 9

1. Install control unit (1) from above.
2. Push fastening element (3) onto control
unit (1).
3. Screw knurled nut (4) onto stud (2).
4. Insert connector in socket X1 on PAN 9.
TIM-ID: 0000038988 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 303

 4.3.11 Battery on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Battery (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

DANGER
Incorrect installation of battery.
Risk of explosion, serious injury – danger to life!
• Avoid short circuits.
• Ensure correct polarity of battery connections.
• Replace battery only with a battery of the same type.

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.

TIM-ID: 0000039080 - 003

304 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Opening yard slot
u Unscrew screws (1) and remove yard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).

Replacing battery
Note: Only use insulated, non-conducting tools!
1. Carefully remove the battery (1) from the
holder.
2. Install new battery (1) in holder.

Closing yard slot

1. Install yard slot cover (3) on SPU front pan-
el (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039080 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 305

 2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

TIM-ID: 0000039080 - 003

306 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.12 SD card on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
SD card (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

NOTICE
Installation and/or removal of the SD card.
Risk of damage to the SD card and the electronic assembly!
• Switch off power supply before installing or removing the SD card.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.
TIM-ID: 0000039079 - 006

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 307

 Opening yard slot
u Unscrew screws (1) and remove yard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).

Removing SD card
u Slide locking switch in direction (A).
Result: SD card (1) is ejected.

Installing SD card
Note: Check order and engine assignment of SD card before installing.
1. Insert SD card (1) in the SD card slot.
Result: SD card (1) is locked in place by the sliding catch.
2. Check firm seating of SD card. Move sliding lock in direction (A) and reinsert SD card.
TIM-ID: 0000039079 - 006

308 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Closing yard slot
1. Install yard slot cover (3) on SPU front pan-
el (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Control Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow the reverse sequence of operations.
TIM-ID: 0000039079 - 006

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 309

 4.3.13 One-time fuse on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
One-time fuse 1 A (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
One-time fuse 3 A (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
One-time fuse 5 A (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Inadequately fused electrical circuits.
Risk of destruction of electronic modules or fire!
• Make sure that fuses are only replaced by ones with identical electrical ratings.

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.
TIM-ID: 0000039081 - 005

310 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Opening shipyard slot
u Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).

Replacing fuse
1. Pinpoint the appropriate fuse.
2. Grasp and remove defective fuse using long
nose pliers.
3. Select fuse with correct electrical rating as
indicated on following table (→ Table 72).
4. Carefully fit new fuse in the plug-in socket.
5. Press the fuse into the socket with one finger
as far as it will go.

Item Designation Value Fuse protection of

1 F11 3A Reserve
2 F12 5A Reserve
3 F6 3A Enginewise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)
4 F7 3A NeutralFRCS (non MTU
RCS)
5 F5 1A Relay 5
TIM-ID: 0000039081 - 005

6 F4 1A Relay 4
7 F10 1A Reserve
8 F3 1A Relay 3
9 F2 1A Relay 2
10 F1 1A Relay 1

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 311

 Item Designation Value Fuse protection of
11 F9 5A GND FRCS (non MTU
RCS)
12 F8 3A CountEngwise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)

Table 72: SPU fuse assignment

Closing shipyard slot

1. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front
panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

TIM-ID: 0000039081 - 005

312 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.14 Cable entry plate on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Cable entry plate (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Open up front panel of LOS 3 (2) as far as it
will go.

Opening shipyard slot

1. Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
2. Slacken the connector retaining clamps in
the shipyard slot (8).
3. Disconnect all connectors in the shipyard
TIM-ID: 0000039082 - 004

slot (8).
4. Unscrew screws (7) and remove cable entry
plate (6) together with routed cables from
SPU (5).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 313

 Removing cable from cable entry plate
1. Note the cable connections, slacken the terminals and carefully remove the cable cores from the connec-
tors.
2. Unscrew the unions at the cable entry plate and remove from the cable entry plate together with cables.

Installing cable at cable entry plate

1. Install unions together with routed cables at the cable entry plate.
2. Slacken terminals and carefully insert cable cores into connectors as noted.

Closing shipyard slot

1. Mount cable entry plate (6) together with
routed cables on SPU (5) using screws (7).

2. Tighten screws (7) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

3. Connect all connectors in the shipyard slot (8).

4. Engage the connector retaining clamps in the shipyard slot (8).
5. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
6. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.
TIM-ID: 0000039082 - 004

314 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.15 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 housing frame – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 5–10 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Housing frame (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing front panel LOS 3

u (→ Page 317)

Removing housing frame

1. Remove screws (3).
2. Remove housing frame (1) with washers (2)
from SPU (4).

Installing housing frame

1. Install housing frame (1) on SPU (4) using
screws (3) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039083 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 315

 2. Tighten screws (3) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 6 Nm

Installing front panel LOS 3

u (→ Page 317)

TIM-ID: 0000039083 - 003

316 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.16 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 front panel LOS 3 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Torque wrench, 5–10 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Front panel LOS 3 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.

Removing front panel LOS 3

1. Disconnect W501 cable connector X1 (10) at
LOP-PAN 1.
2. Unscrew nut (5) at ground strap (7) on inside
of housing frame (8).
3. Remove ground strap (7) with washer (6).
4. Unscrew screw (3) at gas pressure damp-
er (4).
5. Move gas pressure damper (4) downwards as
far as possible.
6. Unscrew screws (9) holding front panel
LOS 3 (2) at both hinges.
TIM-ID: 0000039084 - 003

7. Remove front panel LOS 3 (2).

8. The ground strap on front panel LOS 3 (2) is
removed in the same way as the one on the
housing frame.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 317

 Installing front panel LOS 3
1. Install ground strap (7) on front pan-
el LOS 3 (2) using washers and nut.

2. Tighten nut to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Nut Tightening torque 6 Nm

3. Install front panel LOS 3 (2) on hinges using screws (9).

4. Tighten screws (9) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

5. Move gas pressure damper (4) upwards as far as possible.

6. Install screw (3) on gas pressure damper (4).
7. Tighten screw (3) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

8. Install ground strap (7) on inside of housing frame (8) using nut (5) and washer (6).
9. Tighten nut to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Nut Tightening torque 6 Nm

10. Connect W501 cable connector X1 (10) at LOP-PAN 1.

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

TIM-ID: 0000039084 - 003

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

318 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.17 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 control panel LOP-PAN – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Control panel LOP-PAN (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.

Removing LOP-PAN
1. Disconnect W501 cable connector X1 (2) at
LOP-PAN (1).
TIM-ID: 0000039159 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 319

 2. Pull off protective cap (5).
3. Unscrew nut (6) from stay bolt (3) and re-
move with washer (7).
4. Unscrew knurled nut (4) from stay bolt (3).
5. Remove fastening element (2) from control
unit (1) in downwards direction.
6. Remove control unit (1) upwards.

Installing LOP-PAN
1. Install control unit (1) from above.
2. Attach fastening element (2) to control
unit (1) from below.
3. Screw knurled nut (4) onto stay bolt (3).
4. Screw nut (6) with washer (7) onto stay
bolt (3).

5. Tighten nut (3) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Nut Tightening torque 1 Nm

6. Fit protective cap (5)

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.
TIM-ID: 0000039159 - 003

320 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.18 Systembus Processing Unit SPU on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 –
Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Systembus Processing Unit SPU (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Preparatory steps
1. Open Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 317).
2. Remove connector from underside of LOS 3 front panel (→ Page 317).
Note: Do not remove LOS 3 front panel from housing frame.
3. Remove housing frame with LOS 3 front panel attached (→ Page 317)

Removing housing frame

u (→ Page 315)

Removing Systembus Process-

ing Unit SPU
1. Unscrew grounding stud (9).
2. Remove grounding cable with washer (8).
3. Slacken connector retaining clamps on
SPU front panel (4).
4. Disconnect all connectors on SPU front pan-
el (4).
5. Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2).
6. Slacken the connector retaining clamps in
the shipyard slot (12).
7. Disconnect all shipyard connectors in the
TIM-ID: 0000039085 - 004

shipyard slot (10).

8. Unscrew screws (10) and remove cable entry
plate (11) together with routed cables.
9. Remove screws (6) and cable retainer (7)
with cables attached.
10. Unscrew screws at both SPU retaining brack-
ets (5).
11. Extract SD card (→ Page 335).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 321

 Removing cable from cable entry plate
1. Note the cable connections, slacken the terminals and carefully remove the cable cores from the connec-
tors.
2. Unscrew the unions at the cable entry plate and remove from the cable entry plate together with cables.

Installing cable at cable entry plate

1. Install unions together with routed cables at the cable entry plate.
2. Slacken terminals and carefully insert cable cores into connectors as noted.

Installing Systembus Process-

ing Unit SPU
Note: Before installation, check configuration
(→ Page 275) and check jumper configuration
(→ Page 282).
1. Install SPU with screws at both retaining
brackets (5).
2. Install cable entry plate (11) together with
routed cables on SPU using screws (10).

3. Tighten screws (10) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

4. Insert SD card (→ Page 335).

5. Connect all connectors in the shipyard slot (12).
6. Engage the connector retaining clamps in the shipyard slot (12).
7. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
8. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

9. Install grounding cable with grounding stud (9) and washer (8).
10. Tighten grounding stud (9) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
TIM-ID: 0000039085 - 004

Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

11. Install cable retainer (7) on SPU with screws (6) with cables attached.
12. Connect all connectors on SPU front panel (4).
13. Engage connector retaining clamps on SPU front panel (4).

Installing housing frame with LOS 3 front panel attached

u (→ Page 315)

322 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Final steps
1. Plug in connector on underside of LOS 4 front panel (→ Page 317)
2. Close Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 317).
3. Switch on operating voltage.
4. Check Local Operating Panel LOP 13 settings (→ Page 255).
TIM-ID: 0000039085 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 323

 4.3.19 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 3 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 3 (2)
as far as it will go.

Removing Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
1. Slacken connector retaining clamps on
SPU front panel (4).
2. Disconnect all connectors on SPU front pan-
el (4).
3. Remove screws (6) and cable retainer (5)
TIM-ID: 0000039086 - 004

with cables attached.

4. Unscrew grounding stud (1) at SPU (3).
5. Remove grounding cable with washer (2).

324 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 6. Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
7. Slacken the connector retaining clamps in
the shipyard slot (8).
8. Disconnect all connectors in the shipyard
slot (8).
9. Unscrew screws (7) and remove cable entry
plate (6) together with routed cables from
SPU (5).
10. Extract SD card (→ Page 307).

11. Unscrew both screws at retaining brack-

ets (2) of LOP 13 (1).
12. Remove LOP 13 (1).

Installing Local Operating Panel

LOP 13
Note: Before installation, check configuration
(→ Page 261) and check jumper configuration
(→ Page 268).
1. Install LOP 13 (1).
2. Install both screws at retaining brackets (2)
of LOP 13 (1).
TIM-ID: 0000039086 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 325

 3. Mount cable entry plate (6) together with
routed cables on SPU (5) using screws (7).

4. Tighten screws (7) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

5. Insert SD card (→ Page 335).

6. Connect all connectors in the shipyard slot (8).
7. Engage the connector retaining clamps in the shipyard slot (8).
8. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
9. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

10. Install grounding cable with grounding

bolt (1) and washer (2) on SPU (3).

TIM-ID: 0000039086 - 004

11. Tighten grounding bolt (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

326 | Repair Work | E532396/05E 2016-11

 12. Install cable retainer (5) on SPU with screws (6) with cables attached.
13. Connect all connectors on SPU front panel (4).
14. Engage connector retaining clamps on SPU front panel (4).

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 13

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

Final steps
1. Switch on operating voltage.
2. Check Local Operating Panel LOP 13 settings (→ Page 255).
TIM-ID: 0000039086 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Repair Work | 327

 4.3.20 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

4.3.20.1 MFD display – Replacement

Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
MFD display (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing faulty display

1. Slacken connecting cable (2) from socket (1).

2. Remove grounding cable.

3. Slacken screws on assembly frame.
4. Push assembly frame to the left and remove
display from console in forward direction.
5. Remove SD card. TIM-ID: 0000039098 - 003

328 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Installing new display
1. Check whether gasket is attached on mating face of new display. Attach gasket if necessary.
2. Install new display in reverse order.
3. Fit socket.
4. Fit grounding cable.
5. Insert SD card.
6. Switch on supply voltage.
Result: Check whether LED is flashing at approx. 2 Hz (operating status indicators).
7. Set node number, baud rate and BDM server (→ Page 272).
TIM-ID: 0000039098 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 329

 4.3.20.2 Replacing battery on MFD display
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Electrical power supply switched off at master switch (circuit-breaker).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Battery (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

DANGER
Incorrect installation of battery.
Risk of explosion, serious injury – danger to life!
• Avoid short circuits.
• Ensure correct polarity of battery connections.
• Replace battery only with a battery of the same type.

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Removing battery
1. Remove display (→ Page 328).
2. Undo the screws (5).
3. Carefully pull the top of the display (1) out of
the housing until the connector (2) of the rib-
bon cable is accessible.
4. Unplug the connector (2) from the display
top (1).
5. Remove the top of the display (1).
6. Carefully lift the battery (3) out of its holder.
7. Fit new battery (3).
8. Carefully insert the top of the display (1) into
the housing.
9. Plug the connector (2) into the display
top (1).
10. Fully insert the top of the display (1) into the
housing.
11. Tighten the screws (5).
12. Refit the display (→ Page 328).
TIM-ID: 0000040188 - 003

330 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.3 SD card on MFD display – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
SD card (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

NOTICE
Installation and/or removal of the SD card.
Risk of damage to the SD card and the electronic assembly!
• Switch off power supply before installing or removing the SD card.

Removing SD card
1. Remove the keypad unit (1).
2. Open the rubber seal (3) by pulling upwards
3. Gently press on the SD card (2).
Result: The memory card lock disengages (press/
press lock/unlock).
4. Remove the SD card (2) from the slot (4).

Installing SD memory card

1. Insert new SD card (2) into slot.
2. Gently press on the SD card (2).
Result: The memory card lock engages (press/press lock/unlock).
TIM-ID: 0000040189 - 004

3. Press rubber seal (3) downwards.

4. Fit the key unit (1).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 331

 4.3.20.4 Replacing battery on LOP 14 control panel
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and secured against being restarted.
☑ Electrical power supply switched off at master switch (circuit-breaker).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Battery (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

DANGER
Incorrect installation of battery.
Risk of explosion, serious injury – danger to life!
• Avoid short circuits.
• Ensure correct polarity of battery connections.
• Replace battery only with a battery of the same type.

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening LOP 14 control panel

1. Release the catch (1) of the front panel
LOS 4 (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: Open cover is higher than top edge of LOP.
2. Slowly open LOS 4 front panel (2) fully up-
wards.

TIM-ID: 0000039773 - 004

332 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Opening yard slot
u Unscrew screws (1) and remove yard slot
cover (3) and washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).

Replacing battery
Note: Only use insulated, non-conducting tools!
1. Carefully remove the battery (1) from the
holder.
2. Install new battery (1) in holder.

Closing yard slot

1. Install yard slot cover (3) on SPU front pan-
el (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039773 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 333

 2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing LOP 14 control panel

u Installation is the reverse procedure of removal.

TIM-ID: 0000039773 - 004

334 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.5 SD card on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
SD card (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

NOTICE
Installation and/or removal of the SD card.
Risk of damage to the SD card and the electronic assembly!
• Switch off power supply before installing or removing the SD card.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Unlock the lock (1) for front panel LOS 4 (2)
using screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 4 (2)
as far as it will go.
TIM-ID: 0000039774 - 007

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 335

 Opening yard slot
u Unscrew screws (1) and remove yard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).

Removing SD card
u Slide locking switch in direction (A).
Result: SD card (1) is ejected.

Installing SD card
Note: Check order and engine assignment of SD card before installing.
1. Insert SD card (1) in the SD card slot.
Result: SD card (1) is locked in place by the sliding catch.
2. Check firm seating of SD card. Move sliding lock in direction (A) and reinsert SD card.
TIM-ID: 0000039774 - 007

336 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Closing yard slot
1. Install yard slot cover (3) on SPU front pan-
el (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Control Panel LOP 14

u For installation, follow the reverse sequence of operations.
TIM-ID: 0000039774 - 007

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 337

 4.3.20.6 Fuse on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
One-time fuse 1 A (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
One-time fuse 3 A (→ Spare Parts Catalog)
One-time fuse 5 A (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

NOTICE
Inadequately fused electrical circuits.
Risk of destruction of electronic modules or fire!
• Make sure that fuses are only replaced by ones with identical electrical ratings.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Release the catch (1) of the LOS 4 front pan-
el (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 4 (2)
as far as it will go.
TIM-ID: 0000039775 - 006

338 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Opening shipyard slot
u Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).

Replacing fuse
1. Pinpoint the appropriate fuse.
2. Grasp and remove defective fuse using long
nose pliers.
3. Select fuse with correct electrical rating as
indicated on following table (→ Table 73).
4. Carefully fit new fuse in the plug-in socket.
5. Press the fuse into the socket with one finger
as far as it will go.

Item Designation Value Protects

1 F11 3A Spare
2 F12 5A Spare
3 F6 3A Enginewise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)
4 F7 3A NeutralFRCS (non MTU
RCS)
5 F5 1A Relay 5
TIM-ID: 0000039775 - 006

6 F4 1A Relay 4
7 F10 1A Spare
8 F3 1A Relay 3
9 F2 1A Relay 2
10 F1 1A Relay 1

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 339

 Item Designation Value Protects
11 F9 5A GND FRCS (non MTU
RCS)
12 F8 3A CountEngwise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)

Table 73: SPU fuse assignment

Closing shipyard slot

1. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front
panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).

2. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 14

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

TIM-ID: 0000039775 - 006

340 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.7 Cable entry plate on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Cable entry plate (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Release the catch (1) of the LOS 4 front pan-
el (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 4 (2)
as far as it will go.

Opening shipyard slot

1. Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) with washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
2. Slacken the connector retaining clamps in
the shipyard slot (8).
3. Disconnect all connectors in the shipyard
TIM-ID: 0000039776 - 006

slot (8).
4. Unscrew screws (7) and remove cable entry
plate (6) together with routed cables from
SPU (5).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 341

 Removing cable from cable entry plate
1. Note the cable connections, slacken the terminals and carefully remove the cable cores from the connec-
tors.
2. Unscrew the unions at the cable entry plate and remove from the cable entry plate together with cables.

Installing cable at cable entry plate

1. Install unions together with routed cables at the cable entry plate.
2. Slacken terminals and carefully insert cable cores into connectors as noted.

Closing shipyard slot

1. Mount cable entry plate (6) together with
routed cables on SPU (5) using screws (7).

2. Tighten screws (7) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

3. Connect all connectors in the shipyard slot (8).

4. Engage the connector retaining clamps in the shipyard slot (8).
5. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
6. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 14

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.
TIM-ID: 0000039776 - 006

342 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.8 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 front panel LOS 4 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Torque wrench, 5–10 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Front panel LOS 4 (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Release the catch (1) of the LOS 4 front pan-
el (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: When open, the cover is higher than the top
edge of the LOP.
2. Slowly open up the front panel of LOS 4 (2)
as far as it will go.

Removing front panel LOS 4

1. Remove connector X1 (10) from bottom side
of front panel LOS 4 (1).
2. Unscrew nut (5) at ground strap (7) on inside
of housing frame (8).
3. Remove ground strap (7) with washer (6).
4. Unscrew screw (3) at gas pressure damp-
er (4).
5. Move gas pressure damper (4) downwards as
far as possible.
6. Unscrew screws (9) holding front panel LOS
4 (2) at both hinges.
TIM-ID: 0000039777 - 005

7. Remove front panel LOS 4 (2).

8. The ground strap on front panel LOS 4 (2) is
removed in the same way as the one on the
housing frame.
9. Remove data module MEM from LOS 4
(→ Page 347).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 343

 Installing front panel LOS 4
1. Insert data module MEM in LOS 4
(→ Page 347).
2. Install ground strap (7) on front pan-
el LOS 4 (2) using washers and nut.

3. Tighten nut to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Nut Tightening torque 6 Nm

4. Install front panel LOS 4 (2) on hinges using screws (9).

5. Tighten screws (9) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

6. Move gas pressure damper (4) upwards as far as possible.

7. Install screw (3) on gas pressure damper (4).
8. Tighten screw (3) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

9. Install ground strap (7) on inside of housing frame (8) using nut (5) and washer (6).
10. Tighten nut (5) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Nut Tightening torque 6 Nm

11. Insert connector X1 (10) on bottom side of front panel LOS 4 (1).

Closing Local Operating Panel LOP 14

TIM-ID: 0000039777 - 005

u For installation, follow reverse sequence of working steps.

344 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.9 Battery in LOS 4 front panel of LOP 14 – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ “Low battery status” message appears on Alarm Page.
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Local Operating Panel LOP is switched off.
☑ Local Operating Panel LOP is disconnected from the ship-side power supply.

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Battery type CR 2477 N (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Opening Local Operating Panel

LOP 14
1. Unlock the latches (1) on the LOS 4 front
panel (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: Open flap is higher than top edge of LOP.
2. Slowly open up LOS 4 front panel (2) as far
as it will go.

Replacing battery
1. Undo screws (2).
2. Remove cover (3).
Result: Cover (3) is held by cords (1).
TIM-ID: 0000068091 - 001

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 345

 Note: Have a new battery ready to facilitate speedy
replacement. Previously made settings can
thus be retained (date, time and other basic
settings are buffered).
3. Remove battery (1).
4. Insert new battery (1) in battery holder (2).
5. Check firm seating of battery.
6. Screw on cover of LOS 4 display.
7. Check date/time on LOS 4 display and adjust
as necessary.

TIM-ID: 0000068091 - 001

346 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.10 MEM in front panel of LOS 4 of LOP 14 – Installation
Preconditions
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

NOTICE
Installing and removing the MEM.
Risk of damaging the MEM and the electronic assemblies!
• Switch off the power supply before installing or removing the MEM.

Installing memory module MEM

1. Undo screws (2).
2. Remove cover (3).
Result: Cover (3) is held be cords (1).

3. Pinpoint slot for MEM (1).

4. Insert MEM ensuring correct orientation.
5. Check MEM for secure seating.
6. Screw on cover of LOS 4 display.
7. Set display of LOS 4 (→ Page 257).
TIM-ID: 0000041189 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 347

 4.3.20.11 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 housing frame – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 5–10 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Housing frame (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Removing front panel LOS 4

u (→ Page 343)

Removing housing frame

1. Remove screws (3).
2. Remove housing frame (1) with washers (2)
from SPU (4).

Installing housing frame

1. Install housing frame (1) on SPU (4) using
screws (3) and washers (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039778 - 003

348 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 2. Tighten screws (3) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 6 Nm

Installing front panel LOS 4

u (→ Page 343)
TIM-ID: 0000039778 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 349

 4.3.20.12 Systembus Processing Unit SPU on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 –
Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled.
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
Systembus Processing Unit SPU (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Preparatory steps
1. Open Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (→ Page 343).
2. Remove connector from underside of LOS 4 front panel (→ Page 343).
Note: Do not remove LOS 4 front panel from housing frame.
3. Remove housing frame with LOS 4 front panel attached (→ Page 348)

Removing SPU Systembus Proc-

essing Unit
1. Unscrew grounding bolt (9).
2. Remove grounding cable and washer (8).
3. Slacken connector retaining clamps on
SPU front panel (4).
4. Disconnect all connectors on SPU front pan-
el (4).
5. Unscrew screws (1) and remove shipyard slot
cover (3) and washers (2).
6. Release the connector fasteners in the ship-
yard slot (12).
7. Unplug all shipyard connectors in the ship-
yard slot (10).
8. Unscrew screws (10) and remove cable entry
plate (11) together with routed cables from
SPU ().
TIM-ID: 0000039779 - 006

9. Remove screws (6) and cable fastening

strip (7) with cables fastened to it.
10. Unscrew screws on both SPU retaining brack-
ets (5).
11. Remove SD card (→ Page 335).

350 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Installing SPU Systembus Proc-
essing Unit
Note: Before installation, check configuration
(→ Page 275) and check jumper configuration
(→ Page 282).
1. Fit SPU using screws on both retaining brack-
ets (5).
2. Install cable entry plate (11) together with
routed cables on SPU using screws (10).

3. Tighten screws (10) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

4. Insert SD card (→ Page 335).

5. Connect all connectors in the shipyard slot (12).
6. Engage the connector fasteners in the shipyard slot (12).
7. Install shipyard slot cover (3) on SPU front panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
8. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

9. Fit grounding cable using grounding bolt (9) and washer (8).
10. Tighten grounding bolt (9) to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

11. Refit cable fastening strip (7) with attached cables on SPU using screws (6).
12. Connect all connectors on SPU front panel (4).
13. Engage the connector fasteners on SPU front panel (4).

Installing housing frame with LOS 4 front panel attached

u (→ Page 348)
TIM-ID: 0000039779 - 006

Final operations
1. Plug in connector on underside of LOS 4 front panel (→ Page 343).
2. Close Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (→ Page 343).
3. Switch on operating voltage.
4. Checking Local Operating Panel LOP 14 settings (→ Page 255).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 351

 4.3.20.13 Configuration of CAN nodes BlueVision_Basic | NewGeneration
Automatic node number assignment
The following devices support automatic node number assignment:
• Start/Stop PAN, when node number set to = 0
• LOS 3 (LOP-PAN), when node number set to = 0
• Display Basic DIS, when node number set to = 242
Node number “0” must be set at both PANs (Start/Stop PAN, LOP PAN) and “242” at the display (Basic DIS)
to allow node numbers to be assigned automatically by the system.

Node numbers – Local Operating Panel LOP (engine room)

Note:
• Set the “BDM Function” to “Active” on the display of LOS4.
Device Shaft 2 Shaft 4 Shaft 3 Shaft 1
SPU – MCS module 3dec=03hex 7dec=07hex 5dec=05hex 1dec=01hex
LOS 4 (Display) 4 4 4 4
250 Kbaud 250 Kbaud 250 Kbaud 250 Kbaud

Table 74: Node numbers – Local Operating Panel LOP (engine room)

Node numbers – devices on the control stands

The node numbers of the individual devices apply to all power trains (shaft 1 to 4).
PB= process bus
FB= field bus
Note:
• Set the “BDM Server” function to “2” on the MFD display.
Device Control Control Control Control Control Control
stand 1 stand 2 stand 3 stand 4 stand 5 stand 6
MFD display PB: 4 PB: 4 PB: 4 PB: 4 -- --
FR: 12 FR: 13 FR: 14 FR: 15
250 Kbaud 250 Kbaud 250 Kbaud 250 Kbaud
Propulsion 1 2 3 4 5 6
control lever
RCS DUO/6K

Table 75: Node numbers – devices on the control stands

TIM-ID: 0000041074 - 004

352 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.14 Replacing LOP 14 control panel
Preconditions
☑ Engine shut down and secured against being restarted.
☑ Electrical power supply switched off at master switch (circuit-breaker).

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Torque wrench, 0.5–5 Nm (→ Tools Catalog) 1
LOP 14 control panel (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

NOTICE
Short circuit.
Risk of malfunction or system failure!
• Make sure that no parts fall into the casing.

Opening LOP 14 control panel

1. Release the catch (1) of the front panel
LOS 4 (2) using a screwdriver.
Note: Open cover is higher than top edge of LOP.
2. Slowly open LOS 4 front panel (2) fully up-
wards.

Removing LOP control panel

1. Release connector retaining clamps on
SPU front panel (4).
2. Disconnect all connectors on SPU front pan-
el (4).
3. Remove screws (6) and cable fastening
strip (5) with cables fastened to it.
TIM-ID: 0000039780 - 006

4. Unscrew ground connection bolt (1) on

SPU (3).
5. Remove ground cable and washer (2).

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 353

 6. Unscrew screws (1) and remove yard slot
cover (3) and washers (2) from SPU front
panel (4).
7. Release the connector fasteners in the yard
slot (8).
8. Unplug all connectors in the yard slot (8).
9. Unscrew screws (7) and remove cable feed-
through plate (6) together with routed cables
from SPU (5).
10. Remove SD card (→ Page 335).

11. Unscrew both screws on retaining brack-

ets (2) of LOP 14 (1).
12. Remove LOP 14 (1).

Refitting LOP control panel

Note: Before installation, check configuration
(→ Page 275) and check jumper configuration
(→ Page 282).
1. Refit LOP control panel (1).
2. Fit the two screws on retaining brackets (2)
of LOP (1).
TIM-ID: 0000039780 - 006

354 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 3. Mount cable feedthrough plate (6) together
with routed cables on SPU (5) using
screws (7).

4. Tighten screws (7) to specified torque using a torque wrench.

Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

5. Insert SD card (→ Page 335).

6. Plug in all connectors in the yard slot (8).
7. Engage the connector fasteners in the yard slot (8).
8. Install yard slot cover (3) on SPU front panel (4) using screws (1) and washers (2).
9. Tighten screws (1) to specified torque using torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 3 Nm

10. Connect ground cable to SPU (3) using

ground connection bolt (1) and washer (2).
TIM-ID: 0000039780 - 006

11. Tighten ground connection bolt to specified torque using a torque wrench.
Name Size Type Lubricant Value/Standard
Screw Tightening torque 2 Nm

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 355

 12. Refit cable fastening strip (5) with attached cables on SPU using screws (6).
13. Connect all connectors on SPU front panel (4).
14. Engage the connector fasteners on SPU front panel (4).

Closing LOP 14 control panel

u Installation is the reverse procedure of removal.

Final operations
1. Switch on power supply.
2. Check LOP 14 control panel settings (→ Page 255).

TIM-ID: 0000039780 - 006

356 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.3.20.15 PPC Priming Pump Controller – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Pump type known
☑ Pump current limit known
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

DANGER
Electric voltage supply for operation.
Danger of burns and fatal electric shock!
• Make certain that the power supply to the product is switched off before starting work. Secure
against unintentional switching on!

Electrical current limits

u (→ Page 78)

Replacing PPC
1. Release retaining catches (1) on connectors.
2. Pull out the cables. Mark the cables for iden-
tification as necessary.
3. Undo screws (2) securing cover.
4. Open up the cover.
5. Install new PPC using the same fixings that
have been removed. Replace defective items
with new items of the same type.
6. Plug in connectors and engage retaining
catches.
TIM-ID: 0000040130 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 357

 4.3.20.16 Priming Pump Controller PPC – Repair
Preconditions
☑ Pump type known
☑ Pump current limit known
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (fuse).

DANGER
Electric voltage supply for operation.
Danger of burns and fatal electric shock!
• Make certain that the power supply to the product is switched off before starting work. Secure
against unintentional switching on!

Electrical current limits

u (→ Page 78)

Replacing contactor K001

1. Slacken the screws holding the cover.
2. Open up the cover.
3. Note the numbers and/or colors of the con-
necting cables at terminals 1, 3, 5, 13 and
14, and at A1 and A2 (1).
4. Undo terminal screws (5) 1, 3, 5, 13, 14, A1
and A2.
5. Pull out the connecting cable.
6. Undo terminal screws 2, 4 and 6 (4).
7. Pull motor protection switch (3) off contactor.
8. Insert screwdriver into recess (2), release
spring terminal and remove contactor from
top-hat rail.
9. Snap new contactor into top-hat rail.
10. Install motor protection switch.
11. Connect up all cables as noted in step 3.
12. Close flap and tighten all screws that hold the
cover.

Replacing motor protection

switch Q001
1. Slacken the screws holding the cover.
2. Open up the cover.
3. Note the numbers and colors of the connect-
ing cables (1) at terminals 2, 4 and 6 of the
motor protection switch (3).
TIM-ID: 0000040131 - 003

4. Undo terminal screws (2) 2, 4 and 6.

5. Pull out the connecting cable.
6. Undo terminal screws 2, 4 and 6 (4).
7. Pull motor protection switch (3) off contactor.
8. Install new motor protection switch.
9. Connect up all cables as noted in step 3.
10. Close flap and tighten all screws (2) that hold
the cover.

358 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Setting PPC
Note: Instructions apply to PPC 5 ... 8.
1. Set operating mode switch (1) on current lim-
it relay from position H to position A.
2. Set the current limit adjuster (2) to rated
pump current.
TIM-ID: 0000040131 - 003

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 359

 4.3.20.17 Emergency Panel – Replacement
Preconditions
☑ Engine is stopped and starting disabled
☑ Operating voltage switched off at master switch (circuit breaker)

Special tools, Material, Spare parts

Designation / Use Part No. Qty.
Emergency Panel (→ Spare Parts Catalog)

Replacing Emergency Panel

1. Disconnect plug connector from connector
socket on Emergency Panel.
2. Unscrew knurled nut (2) on stud.
3. Remove fastening element (3) from Emergen-
cy Panel.
4. Lift Emergency Panel out of installation open-
ing (1) in console (4).
5. Install new Emergency Panel in installation
opening (1) from top of console (4).
6. Slide fastening element (3) over Emergency
Panel.
7. Screw knurled nuts (2) onto studs and tight-
en finger-tight.

8. Insert plug connector (3) into connector

socket X1 on the Emergency Panel.
9. Secure cable W201 to eyelet (2) on the fas-
tening element with a cable tie.
10. Connect ground connection X1.1 of cable
W201 to the Emergency Panel (1).
11. Establish connection to ship's ground/earth
at the second ground strap (1).
TIM-ID: 0000068242 - 001

360 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.4 Supplementary Technical Information
4.4.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 – Design
Internal design
Local Operating Panel LOP 13 mechanical design

1 Control panel LOP-PAN

2 Front panel LOS 3
3 Observation window of service display
4 Housing frame
5 Retaining bracket
6 Connections for ECS-6, MCS-6 and RCS-6
7 Systembus Processing Unit SPU; central automation and alarm management component in Local Op-
erating Panel LOP
8 Shipyard slot cable entry plate for shipyard connections
9 Shipyard slot cover; Shipyard connections and configuration
TIM-ID: 0000039099 - 005

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Supplementary Technical Information | 361

 Mechanical design of System bus Processing Unit SPU

1 Yard slot cover 3 Service display 5 Cable bushing plate

2 Front panel 4 Housing
The service display (3) shows the key installation data and alarms on several pages.

TIM-ID: 0000039099 - 005

362 | Supplementary Technical Information | E532396/05E 2016-11

 LEDs on LOP-PAN

No. Labeling LED color LED state Meaning

1 READY FOR OPERA- Green Lit “Ready for operation” status active,
TION start possible.
– Dark “Ready for operation” status not active,
start not possible.
Yellow Flashing “Ready for operation” status active;
however, start not possible, as starter
not ready (e.g. starter in cool-down
phase).
2 START White Flashing Engine starting sequence running. Start-
er not activated.
Lit Starter On
– Dark –
3 STOP White Flashing Engine running. Stopping sequence run-
ning.
Lit Stop command applied with engine at
TIM-ID: 0000039099 - 005

standstill.
– Dark –
4 COMBINED ALARM Yellow Flashing Unacknowledged yellow alarm applied.
HORN OFF Yellow Lit Acknowledged yellow alarm present.
Red Flashing Unacknowledged red alarm applied.
Red Lit Acknowledged red alarm present.
– Dark No alarm is applied.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Supplementary Technical Information | 363

 No. Labeling LED color LED state Meaning
5 OVERSPEED TEST Red Lit Overspeed test is active.
– Dark Overspeed test is not active.
6 EMERGENCY STOP Red Lit Emergency stop is active.
– Dark Emergency stop is not active.
7 LED Blue Lit Power supply applied, normal operation.
Slow flashing (2 Supply voltage applied, system booting,
Hz) no connection to controller, CAN com-
munication error or unsuccessful auto-
matic node number allocation.
Rapid flash- Supply voltage applied, system does not
ing (8 Hz) boot, serious error
Red Slow flashing (2 LEDs 1 to 3 off: “Unable to allocate
Hz) node number” state active.
LEDs 1 to 3 flashing: “Display node
number” state active.
– Dark Power supply missing or low.

Table 76: LOP-PAN – LED status indicators

LEDs in service display area

TIM-ID: 0000039099 - 005

1 LED status 2 Inscription on SPU

364 | Supplementary Technical Information | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Labeling LED color LED state Meaning
1 MCS - PWR Green Lit Internal MCS voltage supply active.
— Dark Internal MCS voltage supply inactive.
2 MCS - DILA Blue Lit MCS processor is ready for operation.
Flashing MCS software not running.
— Dark No voltage supply or LED activation is de-
fective.
3 ETH1 Yellow Lit or System bus 1 communication active.
Flashing
— Dark System bus 1 communication inactive.
4 ETH2 Yellow Lit or System bus 2 communication active.
Flashing
— Dark System bus 2 communication inactive.
5 RCS - DILA Blue Lit RCS processor is ready for operation.
Flashing RCS software not running.
— Dark No voltage supply or LED activation is de-
fective.
6 RCS - PWR Green Lit Internal RCS voltage supply active.
— Dark Internal RCS voltage supply inactive.
7 PWR 2 Green Lit Power supply PWR 2 applied.
- Dark Power supply PWR 2 not applied.
TIM-ID: 0000039099 - 005

8 PWR 1 Green Lit Power supply PWR 1 applied.

- Dark Power supply PWR 1 not applied.

Table 77: SPU LEDs in service display field

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Supplementary Technical Information | 365

 LEDs in shipyard slot

Item Labeling LED color LED state Meaning

1 P1 - NMEA_CAN Green Static or NMEA communication active.
Active LED flashing
2 P2 - NMEA_CAN Red Static or NMEA CAN communication fault.
Error LED flashing

Table 78: SPU LEDs in shipyard slot

LEDs P1 and P2 in the shipyard slot indicate whether data communication is taking place on the NMEA CAN
bus.
TIM-ID: 0000039099 - 005

366 | Supplementary Technical Information | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Fuses in shipyard slot

LOP 13 has 12 exchangeable one-time fuses in the shipyard slot. The one-time fuse assignment is as follows:
Item Designation Value Fuse protection of
1 F11 3A Reserve
2 F12 10 A Reserve
3 F6 3A Enginewise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)
4 F7 3A NeutralFRCS (non MTU
RCS)
5 F5 1A Relay 5
6 F4 1A Relay 4
7 F10 1A Reserve
8 F3 1A Relay 3
9 F2 1A Relay 2
10 F1 1A Relay 1
TIM-ID: 0000039099 - 005

11 F9 5A GND FRCS (non MTU

RCS)
12 F8 3A CountEngwise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)

Table 79: SPU fuse assignment

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Supplementary Technical Information | 367

 4.4.2 Local Operating Panel LOP web function
Preconditions
☑ Crossed Ethernet CAT5 network cable available.
☑ PC/laptop with web browser and Ethernet network interface available.
☑ Web browser Internet Explorer©, Mozilla Firefox, Opera or Google Chrome installed.
☑ Network settings on PC/laptop: IP address 10.0.240.[241-245]; Subnet mask: 255.0.0.0
☑ Administrator rights are required to make certain settings on the PC/laptop.

Note: The Local Operating Panel LOP web function allows retrieval of Local Operating Panel LOP service and dialog
pages.

Preparatory steps
1. Retrieve settings on Local Operating Panel LOP (→ Page 255).
2. Note displayed IP address; e.g. 10.0.240.1.
Note:
3. If the address 0.0.0.0 is displayed, set node number at Local Operating Panel LOP:
• on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 263)
• on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (→ Page 277)
.

Connecting
Note: The connection can also be established using
the existing service port on the main control
stand.
1. Remove connector protection at connector
X20.1 or X20.2 on the LOP (1).
2. Connect Ethernet network cable (3) at con-
nector socket X20.1 or X20.2 on the LOP (1).
3. Connect Ethernet network cable (3) at the
network interface on the PC/laptop (2).

Opening web page

1. Start web browser.
Note: The installed web server can be reached using the web browser - via the web address http://IP address.
2. Replace “IP address” in the address line with the noted LOP IP address (MCS module, RCS module). In the
example above, the address to be entered is as follows: “http://10.0.240.1”
Result: The web page of the MCS module with the transmitted information is displayed.
TIM-ID: 0000039002 - 003

Selecting function
u Select one of the following functions using the menu and the menu pages:
• System run time
– Plant number and index
– Ethernet configuration
• Download tools
• Display active alarms
• Display process data

368 | Supplementary Technical Information | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.4.3 Indicators and Controls (Optional)

4.4.3.1 Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Design

Internal design
Mechanical design of Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1 LOS 4 front panel

2 Printed circuit board, DIS display
3 Housing frame
4 Retaining bracket
5 Connections for ECS-6, MCS-6 and RCS-6
6 Systembus Processing Unit SPU; central automation and alarm management component in Local Op-
erating Panel LOP
7 Shipyard slot cable entry plate for shipyard connections
8 Shipyard slot cover; Shipyard connections and configuration
TIM-ID: 0000039772 - 008

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 369

 Mechanical design of System bus Processing Unit SPU

1 Yard slot cover 3 Service display 5 Cable bushing plate

2 Front panel 4 Housing
The service display (3) shows the key installation data and alarms on several pages.

TIM-ID: 0000039772 - 008

370 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 LEDs in service display area

1 LED status 2 Inscription on SPU

Inscriptions on SPU
TIM-ID: 0000039772 - 008

Item Labeling LED color LED state Meaning

1 MCS - PWR Green Lit Internal MCS voltage supply active.
— Dark Internal MCS voltage supply inactive.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 371

 Item Labeling LED color LED state Meaning
2 MCS - DILA Blue Lit MCS processor is ready for operation.
Flashing MCS software not running.
— Dark No voltage supply or LED activation is de-
fective.
3 ETH1 Yellow Lit or System bus 1 communication active.
Flashing
— Dark System bus 1 communication inactive.
4 ETH2 Yellow Lit or System bus 2 communication active.
Flashing
— Dark System bus 2 communication inactive.
5 RCS - DILA Blue Lit RCS processor is ready for operation.
Flashing RCS software not running.
— Dark No voltage supply or LED activation is de-
fective.
6 RCS - PWR Green Lit Internal RCS voltage supply active.
— Dark Internal RCS voltage supply inactive.
7 PWR 2 Green Lit Power supply PWR 2 applied.
- Dark Power supply PWR 2 not applied.
8 PWR 1 Green Lit Power supply PWR 1 applied.
- Dark Power supply PWR 1 not applied.

Table 80: SPU LEDs in service display area

LEDs in shipyard slot

TIM-ID: 0000039772 - 008

372 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Item Labeling LED color LED state Meaning
1 P1 - NMEA_CAN Green Static or NMEA communication active.
Active LED flashing
2 P2 - NMEA_CAN Red Static or NMEA CAN communication fault.
Error LED flashing

Table 81: SPU LEDs in shipyard slot

LEDs P1 and P2 in the shipyard slot indicate whether data communication is taking place on the NMEA CAN
bus.

Fuses in shipyard slot

LOP 14 has 12 replaceable fuses in the shipyard slot. The one-time fuse assignment is as follows:
Item Designation Value Fuse protection of
1 F11 3A Reserve
2 F12 5A Reserve
3 F6 3A Enginewise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)
TIM-ID: 0000039772 - 008

4 F7 3A NeutralFRCS (non MTU

RCS)
5 F5 1A Relay 5
6 F4 1A Relay 4
7 F10 1A Reserve
8 F3 1A Relay 3
9 F2 1A Relay 2
10 F1 1A Relay 1

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 373

 Item Designation Value Fuse protection of
11 F9 5A GND FRCS (non MTU
RCS)
12 F8 3A CountEngwise FRCS (non
MTU RCS)

Table 82: SPU fuse assignment

TIM-ID: 0000039772 - 008

374 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 4.4.3.2 Priming pump control unit PPC design
Internal design

1 Contactor 3 Housing 5 Mounting bores

2 Motor protection switch 4 Top-hat rail
TIM-ID: 0000008465 - 004

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 375

 5 Preparation for Putting into Operation after
Extended Out-of-Service Periods
5.1 Putting into operation after extended out-of-service periods

Checking system installation

Note: Carry out the tasks listed below in the given order prior to switching on the operating voltage after extended
out-of-service periods (first for one power train, then for the second, third power train etc.). Perform tasks on
devices which are located at numerous control stands consecutively at each control stand.
1. Check that all plug connectors are correctly connected at the Local Operating Panel LOP and that the locking
clips are engaged.
2. Check that all plug connectors on the SPU of Local Operating Panel LOP are plugged in correctly (check con-
nector designations and firm seating; connector housings must be fully pressed home and screwed tight if
necessary).
3. Check that the plug connectors are correctly connected at the Engine Interface Module EIM and that the
locking clips are engaged.
4. Check that all cables have been correctly connected to the batteries and do not cause short circuits.
5. Check that the connector or the cables is/are properly connected at the gearbox.
6. Check that the engine and the various devices in the engine room are properly connected to ground.
7. Check that the command units on the control stands are grounded.
8. Check that all connectors are properly connected to user devices (check connector designations and firm
seating). Make absolutely sure that port and starboard devices have not been misconnected.
9. Check that the jumper plugs are installed in Local Operating Panel LOP.
10. Check that all cables are secured at appropriate points on the vessel.
11. Check that the cables on the engine have been suitably secured. These cables (to the starter and to the En-
gine Control Unit ECU on the engine) must not be allowed to hang loose, they must be secured to the engine.
12. Check that all cables are neatly routed in the control panels. Connector and cable designations should still
be legible when installed, if possible.
13. Check that cables are not routed over sharp edges without offering suitable protection to prevent chafing.
14. Check that no cables can be sheared through when doors or flaps are closed.

Checking power distribution

1. Prepare the multimeter for voltage measuring (connect leads to appropriate jacks, set voltage measuring
range to min. 30 V).
2. Check the fuses and connectors on the individual devices to ensure that the supply voltage is applied and is
within the tolerated range.
TIM-ID: 0000039156 - 002

376 | Preparation for Putting into Operation after Extended Out-of-Service P... | E532396/05E 2016-11
 5.2 Engine start at MCS after extended out-of-service periods
Preconditions
☑ Engine connection and installation completed, particularly cooling circuit and oil supply.
☑ Gearbox is connected in accordance with gearbox documentation.
☑ Operators must familiarize themselves with all emergency operating procedures for the engine and gear-
box. They must be able to stop the engine immediately in case of unforeseen irregularities. Refer to the
operating instructions for information concerning emergency operating procedures.
☑ Ensure that the gearbox is not permanently engaged by means of its emergency mechanism (there are
various ways of permanently engaging the gearbox depending on its design, refer to the gearbox docu-
mentation for details).
☑ Engine and gearbox must be filled or supplied with lube oil, coolant and fuel. Refer to the operating in-
structions and gearbox documentation.
☑ If the vessel is in dry-dock during startup after extended out-of-service periods, the coolant circuit must be
supplied externally via a water line. Furthermore, always make sure that all personnel is clear of the pro-
peller and shaft. Remove the propeller if necessary (shaft still moves).
☑ If the vessel is in the water during startup after extended out-of-service periods, note that the vessel
starts moving when the propulsion control lever is set to engage. The drive shaft flanges must be discon-
nected to prevent this.
☑ Control panel at the commanding control stand is active.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.

Preparation
1. Switch on the overall system for the power train of the engine which is to be started:
• Without key switch (→ Page 139)
TIM-ID: 0000039158 - 003

• With key switch (→ Page 140)

2. Verify that both propulsion control levers of the command unit on the commanding control stand are set to
NEUTRAL.
3. Switch power train ready for operation:
• at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 (→ Page 215)
• at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 (→ Page 221)

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Preparation for Putting into Operation after Extended Out-of-Service P... | 377
 Starting engine
Note: The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton. The engine
then runs down again.
1. Open the graphic page on the display of the commanding control stand. The engine speed etc. is displayed
here.
2. Press START pushbutton.
Result: • LED START flashes.
• Automatic starting sequence is executed.
• LED START lights up.
• The starting sequence is represented on the control stand (or control stands if several are included).
• The display indicates increasing speed.
• The speed display instrument indicates increasing speed.
• Engine runs at idling speed on completion of the starting sequence.
• The power train is ready for engagement.
• The gearbox of the power train is disengaged.

TIM-ID: 0000039158 - 003

378 | Preparation for Putting into Operation after Extended Out-of-Service P... | E532396/05E 2016-11
 5.3 Engine start at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 after extended
out-of-service periods
Preconditions
☑ Engine connection and installation completed, particularly cooling circuit and oil supply.
☑ Gearbox is connected in accordance with gearbox documentation.
☑ Operators must familiarize themselves with all emergency operating procedures for the engine and gear-
box. They must be able to stop the engine immediately in case of unforeseen irregularities. Refer to the
operating instructions for information concerning emergency operating procedures.
☑ Ensure that the gearbox is not permanently engaged by means of its emergency mechanism (there are
various ways of permanently engaging the gearbox depending on its design, refer to the gearbox docu-
mentation for details).
☑ Engine and gearbox must be filled or supplied with lube oil, coolant and fuel. Refer to the operating in-
structions and gearbox documentation.
☑ If the vessel is in dry-dock during start-up after extended out-of-service periods, the coolant circuit must
be supplied externally via a water line. Furthermore, always make sure that all personnel is clear of the
propeller and shaft. Remove the propeller if necessary (shaft still moves).
☑ If the vessel is in the water during start-up after extended out-of-service periods, note that the vessel
starts moving when the propulsion control lever is set to engage. The drive shaft flanges have to be dis-
connected to prevent this.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
TIM-ID: 0000039157 - 004

Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!

• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Preparation for Putting into Operation after Extended Out-of-Service P... | 379
 Preparation
1. Switch on the fully integrated system for the power train of the engine which is to be started:
• Without key switch (→ Page 139)
• With key switch (→ Page 140)
2. Verify that both propulsion control levers of the command unit on the commanding control stand are set to
NEUTRAL.
3. Switch power train ready for operation (→ Page 215).

Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 13

Note: The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton.
1. Open the ECU graphic page on the display of the control stand concerned. The engine speed etc. is displayed
here.
2. Press START pushbutton.
Result: • LED START flashes.
• Automatic starting sequence is executed.
• The starting sequence is represented on the control stand (or control stands if several are included) in the
same way as a normal engine start (→ Page 143).
• Light emitting diode START lights up when the starter engages.
• The engine runs at idling speed on completion of the starting sequence and light emitting diode START
goes out.
• The power train is ready for engagement.
• The gearbox of the power train is disengaged.

TIM-ID: 0000039157 - 004

380 | Preparation for Putting into Operation after Extended Out-of-Service P... | E532396/05E 2016-11
 5.4 Indicators and Controls (Optional)
5.4.1 Engine start at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 after extended out-of-service
periods
Preconditions
☑ Engine connection and installation completed, particularly cooling circuit and oil supply.
☑ Gearbox is connected in accordance with gearbox documentation.
☑ Operators must familiarize themselves with all emergency operating procedures for the engine and gear-
box. They must be able to stop the engine immediately in case of unforeseen irregularities. Refer to the
operating instructions for information concerning emergency operating procedures.
☑ Ensure that the gearbox is not permanently engaged by means of its emergency mechanism (there are
various ways of permanently engaging the gearbox depending on its design, refer to the gearbox docu-
mentation for details).
☑ Engine and gearbox must be filled or supplied with lube oil, coolant and fuel. Refer to the operating in-
structions and gearbox documentation.
☑ If the vessel is in dry-dock during start-up after extended out-of-service periods, the coolant circuit must
be supplied externally via a water line. Furthermore, always make sure that all personnel is clear of the
propeller and shaft. Remove the propeller if necessary (shaft still moves).
☑ If the vessel is in the water during start-up after extended out-of-service periods, note that the vessel
starts moving when the propulsion control lever is set to engage. The drive shaft flanges have to be dis-
connected to prevent this.

DANGER
Rotating and moving engine parts.
Risk of crushing, danger of parts of the body being caught or pulled in!
• Only run the engine at low power. Keep away from the engine's danger zone.

DANGER
In Local mode, the propulsion plant is controlled from the engine room. The person controlling the ves-
sel has no visual contact with the surrounding area.
Risk of collision and serious injury!
• Only operate the vessel using the LOP when a second person is keeping lookout and is ready to alert
the person at the LOP to any potential hazards. These two persons must remain in direct voice con-
tact at all times, e.g. by radio.

WARNING
High level of engine noise when the engine is running.
Risk of damage to hearing!
• Wear ear protectors.
TIM-ID: 0000039828 - 004

NOTICE
Risk of engine damage due to incorrect action.
Risk of severe damage to property!
• Ensure engine is ready for operation before starting. See engine documentation.

NOTICE
Control stations (RCS Remote Control System) deactivated.
Loss of maneuverability, risk of serious property damage!
• Inform authorized control station before switching to local operation.

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | 381

 Preparation
1. Switch on the fully integrated system for the power train of the engine which is to be started:
• Without key switch (→ Page 139)
• With key switch (→ Page 140)
2. Set the propulsion control lever of the command unit on the commanding control stand to NEUTRAL.
3. Switch power train ready for operation (→ Page 221)
4. Switch on Local mode (→ Page 222).

Starting engine at Local Operating Panel LOP 14

1. Open the ECU graphic page on the display of the control stand concerned. The engine speed etc. is displayed
here.
Note: The automatic starting sequence can be canceled at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton.
2. Press illuminated pushbutton START.
Result: • Illuminated pushbutton START lights up white.
• Automatic starting sequence is executed.
• The starting sequence is represented on the control stand (or control stands if several are included) in the
same way as a normal engine start (→ Page 143).
• The engine runs at idling speed on completion of the start sequence.
• Illuminated pushbutton START goes out.
• The power train is ready for engagement.

TIM-ID: 0000039828 - 004

382 | Indicators and Controls (Optional) | E532396/05E 2016-11

 6 Appendix A
6.1 Conversion tables
Length
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
in 25.4 = mm
ft 0.3048 =m
yd 0.9144 =m
stat. mile 1.609 = km
Nm 1.852 = km
yd 3 = ft
yd 36 = in

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

mm 0.03937 = in
m 3.281 = ft
km 0.6215 = stat. mile

Area
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
in 2 645.16 = mm2
ft2 0.0929 = m2
yd2 0.8361 = m2
stat. mile2 2.59 = km2

Unit B multiplied by factor Unit A

mm 2 0.00155 = in2
m2 10.764 = ft2
m2 1.1960 = yd2
km2 0.3861 = stat. mile2

Volume
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
in 3 16387 = mm3
TIM-ID: 0000002173 - 016

ft3 0.02832 = m3
yd3 0.7646 = m3
gallon (U.S.) 3.785 = dm3
gallon (UK) 4.546 = dm3

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

cm3 0.06102 = in3
m3 35.31 = ft3

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Appendix A | 383

 Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A
dm 3 0.2642 = gallon (U.S.)
dm 3 0.22 = gallon (UK)

Volumetric flow
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
gal/min (GPM, U.S.) 3.79 = l/min
gal/min (GPM, U.S.) 0.134 = ft3/min (cfm)
ft3/min (cfm) 1.70 = m3/h

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

l/min 0.264 = gal/min (U.S.)
ft3/min (cfm) 7.48 = gal/min (U.S.)
m3/h 0.589 = ft3/min (cfm)

Velocity
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
ft/s 0.3048 = m/s
stat. mile/h (mph) 1.609 = km/h
knot (UK) 1.852 = km/h

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit B

m/s 3.281 = ft/s
km/h 0.6214 = stat. mile/h (mph)
km/h 0.54 = knot (UK)

Mass
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
lb 0.4536 = kg
oz 28.35 =g
ton (imp.) 1.016 =t

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

g 0.03527 = oz
kg 2.205 = lb
t 0.9842 = ton (imp.)
TIM-ID: 0000002173 - 016

Force
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
lbf 0.4536 = kp
lbf 4.4482 =N
kp 9.80665 =N

384 | Appendix A | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A
kp 2.205 = lbf
N 0.10197 = kp
N 0.2248 = lbf

Density
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
slug/ft3 515.4 = kg/m3

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

kg/m 3 0.00194 = slug/ft3

Torque
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
lbf ft 1.3558 = Nm

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

Nm 0.7376 = lbf ft

Pressure
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
2
lbf/in (psi) 703.1 = kp/m2 (mmH2O)
lbf/in2 (psi) 0.06895 = bar
lbf/ft2 (psf) 47.88 = Pa
inHg 0.03386 = bar
inHg 345.3 = kp/m2 (mmH2O)

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

atm 760 = mmHg
atm 1.0133 = bar
atm 10332 = kp/m2 (mmH2O)
atm 1.0332 = kp/cm2 (at)
atm 14.696 = lbf/in2 (psi)
bar 14.504 = lbf/in2 (psi)
Pa 0.0209 = lbf/ft2 (psf)

2nd moment of mass

TIM-ID: 0000002173 - 016

Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B

slug ft 2 1.3558 = kg m2

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

kg m 2 0.7376 = slug ft2

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Appendix A | 385

 Energy
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
lbf ft 1.356 =J
kcal 4186.8 =J
BTU 1055 =J
CHU 1899 =J

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

J 0.7376 = lbf ft
J 0.0002388 = kcal
J 0.0009478 = BTU
J 0.00052656 = CHU

Power
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
PS 0.7355 = kW
HP 0.7457 = kW
BTU/s 1.054 = kW
kcal/h 1.163 =W
HP 550 = lbf ft/s

Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A

kW 1.36 = PS
kW 1.341 = HP
kW 0.9487 = BTU/s
W 0.8598 = kcal/h
lbf ft/s 0.0018 = HP

Temperature
Celsius Kelvin
x °C - = x + 273.15 K
xK = x − 273.15 °C -
x °F = 5/9(x − 32) °C = 5/9(x − 32) + 273.15 K
x °R = 5/4x °C = (5/4x) + 273.15 K

Fahrenheit Réaumur
x °C = 9/5x + 32 °F = (4/5x) °R
TIM-ID: 0000002173 - 016

xK = 9/5(x − 273.15) + 32 °F = 4/5(x − 273.15) °R

x °F - = 4/9(x − 32) °R
x °R = (9/4x) + 32 °F -

Fuel consumption
Unit A multiplied by factor = Unit B
mile/gal (US) 0.4251 = km/l
gal/mile (US) 2.3527 = l/km

386 | Appendix A | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Unit B multiplied by factor = Unit A
km/l 2.3527 = mile/gal (US)
l/km 0.4251 = gal/mile (US)
TIM-ID: 0000002173 - 016

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Appendix A | 387

 6.2 List of abbreviations
Abbrevia- Meaning Explanation
tion
ADEC Advanced Diesel Engine Control Engine Control Unit
AL Alarm Alarm (general)
ANSI American National Standards Institute Association of American standardization organiza-
tions
ATL Abgasturbolader Exhaust turbocharger
BR Baureihe Series
BML Betriebsmittelleuchte Utility lamp
BV Betriebsstoffvorschrift Fluids and Lubricants Specifications, MTU Publication
No. A01061/..
CAN Controller Area Network Data bus system, bus standard
CoE CAN-over-Ethernet CAN-over-Ethernet connection
CPP Controllable Pitch Propeller
°C Degrees Celsius
DILA Diagnostic lamp
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. German Standards Organization and identifier of Ger-
man standards (DIN = “Deutsche Industrie-Norm”)
DIS Display Unit Display panel
DL Default Lost Alarm: Default CAN bus failure
DTS Depot Test System Test system
ECS Engine Control System
ECU Engine Control Unit Engine governor
EDM Engine Data Module Memory module for engine data
EEPROM Electrically Erasable and Programma- Memory module
ble Read Only Memory
EIM Engine Interface Module Engine interface
EPROM Electrically Programmable Read Only Memory module
Memory
EMU Engine Monitoring Unit
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
ERCS Signal Foreign Control System Signal for RCS provided by shipyard. Non-MTU RCS.
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETC Electronic Transmission Controller J1939 message
ETK Ersatzteilkatalog Spare parts catalog
TIM-ID: 0000037513 - 007

ETH Ethernet Ethernet connection

FCU Flap Control Unit Control unit for exhaust flaps
FDH Field Data Handling
FPP Fixed Pitch Propeller
FRCS Foreign Remote Control System RCS provided by shipyard. Non-MTU RCS.
GND Ground
h Hour
HFST Hauptfahrstand Main Control Station, main control stand

388 | Appendix A | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Abbrevia- Meaning Explanation
tion
HI High Alarm: Measured value exceeds 1st maximum limit
HIHI High High Alarm: Measured value exceeds 2nd maximum limit
value
HRC Human Readable Code
HT High Temperature
Hz Hertz
ICFN ISO – Continuous rating – Fuel stop Power specification in accordance with DIN-ISO
power – Net 3046-7
IDM Interface Data Module Memory module for interface data
IEC International Electrotechnical Commis-
sion
IMO International Maritime Organization
I/O Input/Output
IP International Protection Protection against accidental contact, dust and water
as per DIN 40050
ISO International Standards Organization International umbrella organization for all national
standardization institutes
kg Kilogram
kΩ Kiloohm
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display, Liquid Crystal
Device
LCU Local Control Unit LOP subassembly
LED Light Emitting Diode
LMU Local Monitoring Unit LOP subassembly
LO Low Alarm: Measured value lower than 1st minimum limit
value
LOLO Low Low Alarm: Measured value lower than 2nd minimum limit
value
LOP Local Operating Panel Control console, control panel
LOS Local Operating Station
MCD Marine Control Drive Remotely-controllable and regulated fluid coupling
MCS Monitoring and Control System
MD Missing Data No data available
MFD Multifunction Display
MG Message
TIM-ID: 0000037513 - 007

ML Meldeleuchte Signal lamp

MPU Microprocessing Unit Microprocessor (unit)
mm Millimeter
MTU Motoren- und Turbinen-Union
MΩ Megaohm
ms Millisecond
NFST Nebenfahrstand Slave control stand

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Appendix A | 389

 Abbrevia- Meaning Explanation
tion
NMEA National Marine Electronics Associa-
tion
OT Oberer Totpunkt Top Dead Center
P-xyz Pressure-xyz Pressure measuring point xyz
PAN Panel Control panel
PCU Propeller Control Unit
PCS Process Control System
PGN Parameter Group Number SAEJ1939 message
PPC Priming Pump Control
PVC Polyvinylchloride
PWR Power Power supply
RCS Remote Control System
RET Return
RIM Remote Interface Module Connection device for remote control units
RL Redundancy Lost Alarm: Redundant CAN bus failure
ROS Remote Operating Station Propulsion control lever for remote control
RP Rudder Propeller
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers U.S. standardization organization
SCU System bus Coupling Unit System bus coupler
SD Sensor Defect Alarm: Sensor failure
SDAF Shut Down Air Flaps Emergency air-shutoff flap(s)
SE System Error Operating system error
SILA Safety lamp
SMCS Smart Managed Compact Switch Network distributor
SMU Shaft Speed Monitoring Unit Shaft speed acquisition
SPN Suspect Parameter Number SAEJ1939 message
SPU System bus Processing Unit
SS Safety System Safety system alarm
SSK Schnellschlussklappe(n) Emergency air-shutoff flap(s)
SW Switch
T-xyz Temperature-xyz Temperature measuring point xyz
TD Transmitter Deviation Alarm: Sensor comparison fault
UT Unterer Totpunkt Bottom Dead Center
VS Voith Schneider Voith Schneider drive
TIM-ID: 0000037513 - 007

WJ Water Jet Water jet drive

WZK Werkzeugkatalog Tool catalog
50V_Iso - Insulation voltage 50V

390 | Appendix A | E532396/05E 2016-11

 6.3 MTU Contact/Service Partners
The worldwide network of the sales organization with subsidiaries, sales offices, representatives and custom-
er service centers ensure fast and direct support on site and ensure the high availability of our products.

Local Support
Experienced and qualified specialists place their knowledge and expertise at your disposal.
For locally available support, go to the MTU Internet site: http://www.mtu-online.com

24h Hotline
With our 24h hotline and high flexibility, we're your contact around the clock: during each operating phase,
preventive maintenance and corrective operations in case of a malfunction, for information on changes in
conditions of use and for supplying spare parts.
Your contact person in our Customer Assistance Center:
E-mail: [email protected]
Tel.: +49 7541 9077777
Fax.: +49 7541 9077778
Asia/Pacific: +65 6100 2688
North and Latin America: +1 248 560 8000

Spare Parts Service

Fast, simple and correct identification of spare parts for your drive system or vehicle fleet. The right spare
part at the right time at the right place.
With this aim in mind, we can call on a globally networked spares logistics system, a central warehouse at
headquarters and on-site stores at our subsidiary companies, agencies and service workshops.
Your contact at Headquarters:
E-mail: [email protected]
Tel.: +49 7541 9077777
Fax.: +49 7541 9077778
TIM-ID: 0000000873 - 016

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Appendix A | 391

 7 Appendix B
7.1 Index
A Control panel
Adjusting engine speed from the portable control unit – Checking settings 255
without engagement 176 – Controls and displays
Analog display instrument – LOP-PAN 188
– Replacement 291 – Front panel
Assuming command at portable control unit – Check 286 – Replacement 297
Assuming initial command 148 – Indicators and controls
Assuming initial command on the portable control unit – Start/Stop PAN 90
173 – Node number
– Setting 259
B – Replacement
Battery – Cover cap 296
– On LOP 14 control panel – Labeling kit 299
– Replacing 332 – Locking device 294
– Replacement – LOP-PAN 319
– LOS 4 front panel LOP 14 345 – PAN 9 303
– on Local Operating Panel LOP 13 304 – Pushbutton 301
– Replacing – Settings
– On MFD display 330 – Checking 258
Baud rate – Troubleshooting 239
– Setting 257 Controls and displays
– Local Operating Panel LOP 13 188
C – Local Operating Panel LOP 14 192
Changing engine speed Controls and indicators
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 228 – Portable control unit ROS 8 133
Command transfer 149 Conversion tables 383
Command transfer using portable control unit ROS 8 174 Crash Stop maneuver 151
Command unit ROS 13 Cruising mode (CRS) 154
– For four shafts 131
D
– For two shafts 123
Command unit ROS 15 Design
– For one shaft 121 – LOP 14 369
Command unit ROS 16 – PPC 375
– For three shafts 127 Display and controls
Command unit ROS 17 – Display Basic DIS 93
– For two shafts 125 – Display MFD 113
Configuration Display Basic DIS
– CAN nodes BlueVision_Basic | NewGeneration 352 – Display and controls 93
– Check – Replacement 292
– Local Operating Panel LOP 13 261 – SD card 293
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

– Local Operating Panel LOP 14 – Screen pages 95

– Check 275 – Setting 93
– Setting 277 Display MFD
– Setting – Display and controls 113
– Local Operating Panel LOP 13 263 – Screen pages 115
Contact persons 391 – Single-point alarm acknowledgment 242
Display on LOP 14
– Screen pages, navigation and function keys 195
Docking mode 168

392 | Appendix B | E532396/05E 2016-11

 E Engine start
ECS-6 – After extended out-of-service periods
– Interaction of devices and signal paths 67 – At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 379
– Overview 64 – At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 381
– Purpose of the units 65 – At MCS 377
ECU 7 – Interlock
– Technical data 75 – At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 219
Emergency Panel – At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 231
– Change of direction 183 Engine wiring – Check 254
– Clutch engagement 181
F
– Engine speed
– Change 185 Faults
– Indicators and controls 136 – in the system 233
– Purpose and use of the device 45 Fuse
– Replacement 360 – On Local Operating Panel LOP 14
– Labeling kit 299 – Replacement 338
– Pushbutton 301
G
– Switching off 186
– Switching on 180 Gearbox
– Technical data 86 – Engagement/disengagement
Emergency panel – At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 226
– Replacement H
– Cover cap 296
High Idle 170
– Front panel 297
Hotline 391
– Locking device 294
Emergency stop test I
– Local Operating Panel LOP 13 248
Indicators and controls
– Local Operating Panel LOP 14 252
– Control panel Start/Stop PAN 90
Engine
– MCS-6 87
– Cranking
Individual alarm acknowledgement
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 249
– Display Basic DIS 93
– Emergency shutdown
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 220 J
– Local Operating Panel LOP 14 232
Jumper configuration
– On control stand 147
– Check
– Shutdown
– Local Operating Panel LOP 13 268
– At control stand 146
– Local Operating Panel LOP 14
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 218
– Check 282
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 229
– Startup L
– At control stand 143
Lamp test 250
– Start-up
List of abbreviations 388
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 216, 217
Local mode
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 223, 224
– Activation
– Switching ready for operation
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 222
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 215
– Deactivation
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 221
– at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 230
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

– Turning
Local Operating Panel
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 14 253
– Web functions 368
Engine Control Unit
Local Operating Panel LOP
– Technical data
– Fault indication on service display 240
– ECU 7 75
– Local mode 187
Engine speed
– Signal paths 57
– Change
– Emergency Panel 185
Engine speed instrument
– Display overview 109

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Index | 393

 Local Operating Panel LOP 13 Local Operating Panel LOP 14
– Check – Cable entry plate
– Configuration 261 – Replacement 341
– Jumper configuration 268 – Changing engine speed 228
– Controls and displays 188 – Configuration
– Design 361 – Check 275
– Emergency stop test 248 – Controls and displays 192
– Engine – Design 369
– Cranking 249 – Emergency stop test 252
– Emergency shutdown 220 – Engine
– Shutdown 218 – Emergency shutdown 232
– Start-up 216, 217 – Putting into operation 223, 224
– Switching ready for operation 215 – Shutdown 229
– Engine start – Turning 253
– Interlock 219 – Engine start
– Engine start after extended out-of-service periods – After extended out-of-service periods 381
379 – Interlock 231
– Overspeed test 247 – Fuse
– Purpose 60 – Replacement 338
– Replacement 324 – Gearbox
– Battery 304 – Engagement/disengagement 226
– Cable entry plate 313 – Local mode
– Front panel LOS 3 317 – Activation 222
– Housing frame 315 – Deactivation 230
– LOP-PAN 319 – Overspeed test 251
– One-time fuse 310 – Purpose 62
– SD card 307 – Replacement
– Systembus Processing Unit SPU 321 – Front panel LOS 4 343
– Set – Housing frame 348
– Configuration 263 – SD card 335
– Systembus Processing Unit SPU 350
– Troubleshooting 243, 246
Local Operating Panel LOP 14
– Configuration
– Setting 277
– Jumper configuration
– Check 282
LOP
– Checking settings 255
– Fault indication on the service display 240
– Web functions 368
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

394 | Index | E532396/05E 2016-11

 LOP 13 M
– Check Main control stand and slave control stands
– Configuration 261 – MCS-6 33
– Jumper configuration 268 – RCS-6 51
– Controls and displays 188 Maneuvering 150
– Design 361 MCS-6
– Emergency stop test 248 – Indicators and controls 87
– Engine – Main control stand and slave control stands 33
– Cranking 249 – Overview 24
– Initial engine start 379 – Purpose of the units 28
– Overspeed test 247 MEM
– Purpose 60 – Installation
– Replacement 324 – Front panel LOS 4 LOP 14 347
– Battery 304 MFD display
– Cable entry plate 313 – Battery
– Front panel LOS 3 317 – Replacing 330
– Housing frame 315 – Check
– LOP-PAN 319 – Settings 271
– One-time fuse 310 – Replacement 328
– SD card 307 – SD card
– Systembus Processing Unit SPU 321 – Replacement 331
– Set – Setting 272
– Configuration 263 MTU contact persons 391
LOP 14 Multiple-engine plants
– Battery – Numbering convention 22
– Replacing 332
– Cable entry plate N
– Replacement 341 Node number
– Configuration – Check
– Check 275 – Local Operating Panel LOP 13 261
– Setting 277 – Local Operating Panel LOP 14
– Controls and displays 192 – Check 275
– Design 369 – Setting 277
– Emergency stop test 252 – Setting
– Engine – Control panel PAN 9 259
– Turning 253 – Local Operating Panel LOP 13 263
– Fuse Node number (DIS)
– Replacement 338 – Setting 257
– Initial engine start 381 Numbering convention
– Jumper configuration – Multiple-engine plants 22
– Check 282
– Purpose 62 O
– Replacement Oil priming pump control unit
– Front panel LOS 4 343 – Check function 285
– Housing frame 348 One-time fuse
– SD card 335 – Replacement
– Systembus Processing Unit SPU 350 – On Local Operating Panel LOP 13 310
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

– Replacing 353 Operation 175

– Test overspeed 251 Overall system
– Troubleshooting 243, 246 – Switching off
LOP 14 control panel – With key switch (optional) 142
– Battery – Without key switch 141
– Replacing 332 – Switching on
– Replacing 353 – With key switch (optional) 140
LOP display DIS Override function
– Setting 257 – Activating 144
– Deactivation 145

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Index | 395

 Overspeed test Purpose and function of the devices
– At Local Operating Panel LOP 13 247 – RCS-HSG (portable control unit system) 47
Overview Purpose of the units
– ECS-6 64 – ECS-6 65
– MCS-6 24 – MCS-6 28
– RCS-6 35 – RCS-6 41
– System 17 Putting into operation after extended out-of-service peri-
ods
P – Checks 376
Palm Beach command unit ROS 17 – Engine start at Local Operating Panel LOP 13 379
– Setting 287 – Engine start at Local Operating Panel LOP 14 381
PAN 9 Putting into operation after extended out-of-service peri-
– Controls and displays ods
– LOP-PAN 188 – Engine start at MCS 377
– Front panel
– Replacing 297 R
– Indicators and controls RCS modes
– Start/Stop PAN 90 – Additional functions 153
– Node number RCS propulsion modes 152
– Setting 259 RCS-6
– Replacement 303 – Main control stand and slave control stands 51
– Cover cap 296 – Overview 35
– Labeling kit 299 – Purpose of the units 41
– Locking device 294 RCS-HSG (portable control unit system)
– Pushbutton 301 – Purpose and function of the devices 47
– Settings ROS 17
– Check 258 – Setting 287
– Troubleshooting 239 ROS 8
Portable control unit – Checking command transfer 286
– Checking command transfer 286 – Checking speed control and clutch setting 289
– Checking speed control and clutch setting 289 – Controls and indicators 133
– Controls and indicators 133 – Putting into operation 171
– Putting into operation 171 – Putting out of operation 179
– Putting out of operation 179 ROS command unit
Portable control unit ROS 8 – Dead man's device 50 – Replacement 290
Portable control unit speed control and clutch setting –
Check 289 S
PPC Safety notices, standards 16
– Check function 285 Safety regulations
– Controls and indicators 214 – Environmental protection 14
– Design 375 – Fire prevention 14
– Purpose 68 – Fluids and lubricants 14
– Repair 358 – Important provisions 6
– Replacement 357 – Indirect materials 14
Pre-startup checks 376 – Initial start-up 8
Priming pump control unit – Maintenance work 10
– Design 375 – Operation 8
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

Priming Pump Controller – Organizational requirements 7

– Repair 358 – Personnel requirements 7
– Replacement 357 – Repair work 10
Priming Pump Controller PPC Safety requirements
– Controls and indicators 214 – Safety notices, standards 16
– Purpose 68 SD card
Purpose – Replacement
– Local Operating Panel LOP 13 60 – On display Basic DIS 293
– Local Operating Panel LOP 14 62 – On Local Operating Panel LOP 13 307
– Priming Pump Controller PPC 68 – On Local Operating Panel LOP 14 335
– Subsystems 21 – On MFD display 331
Service partners 391

396 | Index | E532396/05E 2016-11

 Settings Troubleshooting 235
– Check – At display of Local Operating Panel LOP 14 246
– MFD display 271 – Control panel PAN 9 239
– Control panel PAN 9 – Display of Local Operating Panel LOP 14 243
– Check 258
– LOP control panel W
– Checking 255 Warm-up mode (engine speed adjustment without engage-
Signal paths ment)
– Local Operating Panel LOP 57 – Activation 167
Single-point alarm acknowledgment Web function
– on display MFD 242 – Local Operating Panel LOP 368
Slave control stand
– MCS-6 33
– RCS-6 51
Smart Cruise mode (SCRS) 156
Smart Speed Adjust (SSA) 169
Spare parts service 391
SPU
– Replacement 321, 350
Subsystems
– Purpose 21
Switching on the overall system
– Without key switch 139
Synchronization mode
– SCL and SMART SYNC 162
– SCL (Single Control Lever mode)
– Activation 163
– Deactivation 164
– SMART SYNC
– Activation 165
Synchronization mode (SMART SYNC) – Deactivation 166
System
– Overview 17
Systembus Processing Unit SPU
– Replacement 321, 350

T
Technical data
– Display Basic DIS 72
– Display MFD 73
– EIM 2 77
– Local Operating Panel LOP 13 69
– Local Operating Panel LOP 14 70
– PAN 9 71
– PPC 78
– RIM 2 84
– ROS 15 81
DCL-ID: 0000021074 - 006

– ROS 16 82
– ROS 13–05 79
– ROS 13–06 80
– ROS 17 83
– ROS 8 85
Test overspeed
– on Local Operating Panel LOP 14 251
Trolling mode
– Deselection 178
– Selection 177
Trolling mode (TRL) 160

E532396/05E 2016-11 | Index | 397